8286af65eefdf9d8b454c1c06eb5af985b1da058
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texi
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set CSKY
25 @set H8300
26 @set HPPA
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set PDP11
35 @set POWERPC
36 @set POWERPC64
37 @set Renesas
38 @set S/390
39 @set SPU
40 @set TICOFF
41 @set WIN32
42 @set XTENSA
43 @end ifset
44 @c man end
45
46 @ifnottex
47 @dircategory Software development
48 @direntry
49 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
50 @end direntry
51 @end ifnottex
52
53 @copying
54 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
55 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
56 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
57 @end ifset
58 version @value{VERSION}.
59
60 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
61
62 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
63 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
64 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
65 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
66 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
67 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
68 @end copying
69 @iftex
70 @finalout
71 @setchapternewpage odd
72 @settitle The GNU linker
73 @titlepage
74 @title The GNU linker
75 @sp 1
76 @subtitle @code{ld}
77 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
78 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
79 @end ifset
80 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
81 @author Steve Chamberlain
82 @author Ian Lance Taylor
83 @page
84
85 @tex
86 {\parskip=0pt
87 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
88 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
89 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
90 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
91 }
92 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
93 @end tex
94
95 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
96 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
97 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
98
99 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
100 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
101 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
102 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
103 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
104 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
105 @c man end
106
107 @end titlepage
108 @end iftex
109 @contents
110 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
111
112 @ifnottex
113 @node Top
114 @top LD
115 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
116 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
117 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
118 @end ifset
119 version @value{VERSION}.
120
121 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
122 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
123 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
124
125 @menu
126 * Overview:: Overview
127 * Invocation:: Invocation
128 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
129 @ifset GENERIC
130 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
131 @end ifset
132 @ifclear GENERIC
133 @ifset H8300
134 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
135 @end ifset
136 @ifset Renesas
137 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
138 @end ifset
139 @ifset ARM
140 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
141 @end ifset
142 @ifset M68HC11
143 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
144 @end ifset
145 @ifset HPPA
146 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
147 @end ifset
148 @ifset M68K
149 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
150 @end ifset
151 @ifset MIPS
152 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
153 @end ifset
154 @ifset POWERPC
155 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
156 @end ifset
157 @ifset POWERPC64
158 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
159 @end ifset
160 @ifset S/390
161 * S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
162 @end ifset
163 @ifset SPU
164 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
165 @end ifset
166 @ifset TICOFF
167 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
168 @end ifset
169 @ifset WIN32
170 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
171 @end ifset
172 @ifset XTENSA
173 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
174 @end ifset
175 @end ifclear
176 @ifclear SingleFormat
177 * BFD:: BFD
178 @end ifclear
179 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
180
181 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
182 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
183 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
184 * LD Index:: LD Index
185 @end menu
186 @end ifnottex
187
188 @node Overview
189 @chapter Overview
190
191 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
192 @cindex what is this?
193
194 @ifset man
195 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
196 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
197 @c man end
198
199 @c man begin SEEALSO
200 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
201 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
202 @file{ld}.
203 @c man end
204 @end ifset
205
206 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
207
208 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
209 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
210 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
211
212 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
213 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
214 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
215
216 @ifset man
217 @c For the man only
218 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
219 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
220 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
221 @end ifset
222
223 @ifclear SingleFormat
224 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
225 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
226 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
227 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
228 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
229 @end ifclear
230
231 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
232 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
233 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
234 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
235 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
236
237 @c man end
238
239 @node Invocation
240 @chapter Invocation
241
242 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
243
244 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
245 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
246 you have many choices to control its behavior.
247
248 @c man end
249
250 @ifset UsesEnvVars
251 @menu
252 * Options:: Command-line Options
253 * Environment:: Environment Variables
254 @end menu
255
256 @node Options
257 @section Command-line Options
258 @end ifset
259
260 @cindex command line
261 @cindex options
262
263 @c man begin OPTIONS
264
265 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
266 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
267 @cindex standard Unix system
268 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
269 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
270 link a file @code{hello.o}:
271
272 @smallexample
273 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
274 @end smallexample
275
276 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
277 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
278 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
279 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
280
281 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
282 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
283 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
284 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
285 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
286 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
287 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
288 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
289 noted in the descriptions below.
290
291 @cindex object files
292 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
293 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
294 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
295 an option and its argument.
296
297 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
298 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
299 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
300 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
301 message @samp{No input files}.
302
303 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
304 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
305 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
306 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
307 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
308 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
309 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
310 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
311 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
312 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
313 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
314
315 For options whose names are a single letter,
316 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
317 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
318 option that requires them.
319
320 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
321 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
322 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
323 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
324 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
325 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
326 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
327 output.
328
329 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
330 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
331 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
332 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
333 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
334 accepted.
335
336 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
337 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command-line options should be
338 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
339 compiler driver) like this:
340
341 @smallexample
342 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
343 @end smallexample
344
345 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
346 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
347 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
348 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
349 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
350 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
351 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
352
353 @smallexample
354 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
355 @end smallexample
356
357 Here is a table of the generic command-line switches accepted by the GNU
358 linker:
359
360 @table @gcctabopt
361 @include at-file.texi
362
363 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
364 @item -a @var{keyword}
365 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
366 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
367 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
368 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
369 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
370
371 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
372 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
373 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
374 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
375 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
376 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
377 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
378 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
379 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
380 interface.
381
382 @ifclear SingleFormat
383 @cindex binary input format
384 @kindex -b @var{format}
385 @kindex --format=@var{format}
386 @cindex input format
387 @cindex input format
388 @item -b @var{input-format}
389 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
390 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
391 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
392 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
393 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
394 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
395 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
396 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
397 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
398 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
399 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
400 @xref{BFD}.
401
402 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
403 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
404 linking object files of different formats), by including
405 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
406 particular format.
407
408 The default format is taken from the environment variable
409 @code{GNUTARGET}.
410 @ifset UsesEnvVars
411 @xref{Environment}.
412 @end ifset
413 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
414 @code{TARGET};
415 @ifclear man
416 see @ref{Format Commands}.
417 @end ifclear
418 @end ifclear
419
420 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
421 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
422 @cindex compatibility, MRI
423 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
424 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
425 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
426 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
427 @ifclear man
428 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
429 @end ifclear
430 @ifset man
431 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
432 @end ifset
433 Introduce MRI script files with
434 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
435 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
436 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
437 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
438
439 @cindex common allocation
440 @kindex -d
441 @kindex -dc
442 @kindex -dp
443 @item -d
444 @itemx -dc
445 @itemx -dp
446 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
447 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
448 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
449 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
450 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
451
452 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
453 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
454 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
455 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
456 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
457 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
458 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
459 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
460 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
461 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
462
463 @kindex --enable-non-contiguous-regions
464 @item --enable-non-contiguous-regions
465 This option avoids generating an error if an input section does not
466 fit a matching output section. The linker tries to allocate the input
467 section to subseque nt matching output sections, and generates an
468 error only if no output section is large enough. This is useful when
469 several non-contiguous memory regions are available and the input
470 section does not require a particular one. The order in which input
471 sections are evaluated does not change, for instance:
472
473 @smallexample
474 MEMORY @{
475 MEM1 (rwx) : ORIGIN : 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x14
476 MEM2 (rwx) : ORIGIN : 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x40
477 MEM3 (rwx) : ORIGIN : 0x2000, LENGTH = 0x40
478 @}
479 SECTIONS @{
480 mem1 : @{ *(.data.*); @} > MEM1
481 mem2 : @{ *(.data.*); @} > MEM2
482 mem3 : @{ *(.data.*); @} > MEM2
483 @}
484
485 with input sections:
486 .data.1: size 8
487 .data.2: size 0x10
488 .data.3: size 4
489
490 results in .data.1 affected to mem1, and .data.2 and .data.3
491 affected to mem2, even though .data.3 would fit in mem3.
492 @end smallexample
493
494 This option is incompatible with INSERT statements because it changes
495 the way input sections are mapped to output sections.
496
497 @kindex --enable-non-contiguous-regions-warnings
498 @item --enable-non-contiguous-regions-warnings
499 This option enables warnings when
500 @code{--enable-non-contiguous-regions} allows possibly unexpected
501 matches in sections mapping, potentially leading to silently
502 discarding a section instead of failing because it does not fit any
503 output region.
504
505 @cindex entry point, from command line
506 @kindex -e @var{entry}
507 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
508 @item -e @var{entry}
509 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
510 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
511 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
512 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
513 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
514 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
515 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
516 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
517
518 @kindex --exclude-libs
519 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
520 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
521 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
522 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
523 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
524 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
525 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
526 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
527 be treated as hidden.
528
529 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
530 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
531 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
532 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
533 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
534 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
535 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
536 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
537 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
538 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
539 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
540 regardless of this option.
541
542 @cindex dynamic symbol table
543 @kindex -E
544 @kindex --export-dynamic
545 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
546 @item -E
547 @itemx --export-dynamic
548 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
549 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
550 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
551 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
552 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
553
554 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
555 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
556 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
557 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
558
559 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
560 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
561 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
562 linking the program itself.
563
564 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
565 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
566 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
567
568 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
569 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
570 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
571
572 @ifclear SingleFormat
573 @cindex big-endian objects
574 @cindex endianness
575 @kindex -EB
576 @item -EB
577 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
578
579 @cindex little-endian objects
580 @kindex -EL
581 @item -EL
582 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
583 @end ifclear
584
585 @kindex -f @var{name}
586 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
587 @item -f @var{name}
588 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
589 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
590 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
591 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
592 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
593
594 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
595 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
596 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
597 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
598 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
599 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
600 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
601 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
602 machine-specific performance.
603
604 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
605 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
606
607 @kindex -F @var{name}
608 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
609 @item -F @var{name}
610 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
611 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
612 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
613 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
614 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
615
616 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
617 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
618 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
619 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
620 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
621 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
622 @var{name}.
623
624 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
625 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
626 object files.
627 @ifclear SingleFormat
628 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
629 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
630 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
631 environment variable.
632 @end ifclear
633 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
634 creating an ELF shared object.
635
636 @cindex finalization function
637 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
638 @item -fini=@var{name}
639 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
640 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
641 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
642 the function to call.
643
644 @kindex -g
645 @item -g
646 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
647
648 @kindex -G @var{value}
649 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
650 @cindex object size
651 @item -G @var{value}
652 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
653 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
654 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
655 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
656 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
657
658 @cindex runtime library name
659 @kindex -h @var{name}
660 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
661 @item -h @var{name}
662 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
663 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
664 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
665 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
666 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
667 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
668
669 @kindex -i
670 @cindex incremental link
671 @item -i
672 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
673
674 @cindex initialization function
675 @kindex -init=@var{name}
676 @item -init=@var{name}
677 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
678 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
679 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
680 function to call.
681
682 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
683 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
684 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
685 @item -l @var{namespec}
686 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
687 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
688 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
689 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
690 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
691 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
692
693 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
694 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
695 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
696 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
697 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
698 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
699 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
700 @var{filename}.
701
702 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
703 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
704 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
705 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
706 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
707 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
708
709 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
710 archives multiple times.
711
712 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
713
714 @ifset GENERIC
715 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
716 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
717 behaviour of the AIX linker.
718 @end ifset
719
720 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
721 @kindex -L @var{dir}
722 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
723 @item -L @var{searchdir}
724 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
725 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
726 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
727 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
728 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
729 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
730 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
731 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
732 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
733 option is specified.
734
735 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
736 prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
737 @samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
738
739 @ifset UsesEnvVars
740 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
741 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
742 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
743 @end ifset
744
745 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
746 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
747 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
748
749 @cindex emulation
750 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
751 @item -m @var{emulation}
752 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
753 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
754
755 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
756 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
757
758 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
759 configured.
760
761 @cindex link map
762 @kindex -M
763 @kindex --print-map
764 @item -M
765 @itemx --print-map
766 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
767 information about the link, including the following:
768
769 @itemize @bullet
770 @item
771 Where object files are mapped into memory.
772 @item
773 How common symbols are allocated.
774 @item
775 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
776 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
777 @item
778 The values assigned to symbols.
779
780 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
781 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
782 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
783 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
784 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
785 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
786 linker script containing:
787
788 @smallexample
789 foo = 1
790 foo = foo * 4
791 foo = foo + 8
792 @end smallexample
793
794 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
795 option is used:
796
797 @smallexample
798 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
799 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
800 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
801 @end smallexample
802
803 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
804 scripts.
805
806 @item
807 How GNU properties are merged.
808
809 When the linker merges input .note.gnu.property sections into one output
810 .note.gnu.property section, some properties are removed or updated.
811 These actions are reported in the link map. For example:
812
813 @smallexample
814 Removed property 0xc0000002 to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (not found)
815 @end smallexample
816
817 This indicates that property 0xc0000002 is removed from output when
818 merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose property 0xc0000002 value
819 is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, which doesn't have property 0xc0000002.
820
821 @smallexample
822 Updated property 0xc0010001 (0x1) to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (0x1)
823 @end smallexample
824
825 This indicates that property 0xc0010001 value is updated to 0x1 in output
826 when merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value
827 is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value is 0x1.
828 @end itemize
829
830 @cindex link map discarded
831 @kindex --print-map-discarded
832 @kindex --no-print-map-discarded
833 @item --print-map-discarded
834 @itemx --no-print-map-discarded
835 Print (or do not print) the list of discarded and garbage collected sections
836 in the link map. Enabled by default.
837
838 @kindex -n
839 @cindex read-only text
840 @cindex NMAGIC
841 @kindex --nmagic
842 @item -n
843 @itemx --nmagic
844 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
845 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
846 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
847
848 @kindex -N
849 @kindex --omagic
850 @cindex read/write from cmd line
851 @cindex OMAGIC
852 @item -N
853 @itemx --omagic
854 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
855 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
856 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
857 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
858 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
859 specification published by Microsoft.
860
861 @kindex --no-omagic
862 @cindex OMAGIC
863 @item --no-omagic
864 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
865 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
866 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
867 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
868
869 @kindex -o @var{output}
870 @kindex --output=@var{output}
871 @cindex naming the output file
872 @item -o @var{output}
873 @itemx --output=@var{output}
874 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
875 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
876 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
877
878 @kindex -O @var{level}
879 @cindex generating optimized output
880 @item -O @var{level}
881 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
882 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
883 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
884 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
885 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
886 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
887 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
888
889 @kindex -plugin @var{name}
890 @item -plugin @var{name}
891 Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
892 the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
893 automatically added by the complier, when using link time
894 optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
895 wish.
896
897 Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
898 from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
899 @command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
900 those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
901 copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
902 based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
903 just copy in the newest one.
904
905 @kindex --push-state
906 @cindex push state governing input file handling
907 @item --push-state
908 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
909 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
910 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
911
912 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
913 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
914 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
915 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
916 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
917 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
918
919 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
920 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
921 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
922 something as follows:
923
924 @smallexample
925 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
926 @end smallexample
927
928 @kindex --pop-state
929 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
930 @item --pop-state
931 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
932 flags governing input file handling.
933
934 @kindex -q
935 @kindex --emit-relocs
936 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
937 @item -q
938 @itemx --emit-relocs
939 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
940 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
941 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
942 in larger executables.
943
944 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
945
946 @kindex --force-dynamic
947 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
948 @item --force-dynamic
949 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
950 to VxWorks targets.
951
952 @cindex partial link
953 @cindex relocatable output
954 @kindex -r
955 @kindex --relocatable
956 @item -r
957 @itemx --relocatable
958 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
959 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
960 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
961 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
962 @code{OMAGIC}.
963 @c ; see @option{-N}.
964 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
965 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
966 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
967
968 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
969 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
970 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
971 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
972 with input files in other formats at all.
973
974 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
975
976 @kindex -R @var{file}
977 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
978 @cindex symbol-only input
979 @item -R @var{filename}
980 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
981 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
982 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
983 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
984 programs. You may use this option more than once.
985
986 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
987 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
988 the @option{-rpath} option.
989
990 @kindex -s
991 @kindex --strip-all
992 @cindex strip all symbols
993 @item -s
994 @itemx --strip-all
995 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
996
997 @kindex -S
998 @kindex --strip-debug
999 @cindex strip debugger symbols
1000 @item -S
1001 @itemx --strip-debug
1002 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
1003
1004 @kindex --strip-discarded
1005 @kindex --no-strip-discarded
1006 @item --strip-discarded
1007 @itemx --no-strip-discarded
1008 Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
1009 Enabled by default.
1010
1011 @kindex -t
1012 @kindex --trace
1013 @cindex input files, displaying
1014 @item -t
1015 @itemx --trace
1016 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them. If
1017 @samp{-t} is given twice then members within archives are also printed.
1018 @samp{-t} output is useful to generate a list of all the object files
1019 and scripts involved in linking, for example, when packaging files for
1020 a linker bug report.
1021
1022 @kindex -T @var{script}
1023 @kindex --script=@var{script}
1024 @cindex script files
1025 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
1026 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
1027 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
1028 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
1029 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
1030 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
1031 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
1032 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
1033 options accumulate.
1034
1035 @kindex -dT @var{script}
1036 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
1037 @cindex script files
1038 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
1039 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
1040 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
1041
1042 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
1043 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
1044 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
1045 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
1046 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
1047 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
1048 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
1049 @samp{gcc}).
1050
1051 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
1052 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
1053 @cindex undefined symbol
1054 @item -u @var{symbol}
1055 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
1056 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
1057 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
1058 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
1059 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
1060 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
1061
1062 If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1063 into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1064 undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1065 instead.
1066
1067 @kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1068 @cindex symbols, require defined
1069 @cindex defined symbol
1070 @item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1071 Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1072 is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1073 is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1074 and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1075 @code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1076 can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1077
1078 @kindex -Ur
1079 @cindex constructors
1080 @item -Ur
1081 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1082 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
1083 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
1084 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1085 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1086 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1087 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1088 @samp{-r} for the others.
1089
1090 @kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1091 @cindex orphan sections
1092 @cindex sections, orphan
1093 @item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1094 Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1095 specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1096
1097 @var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1098
1099 @table @code
1100 @item place
1101 Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1102 the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1103 @samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
1104
1105 @item discard
1106 All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1107 @samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1108
1109 @item warn
1110 The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1111 issue a warning.
1112
1113 @item error
1114 The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1115 @end table
1116
1117 The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1118
1119 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1120 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1121 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1122 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1123 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1124 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1125 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1126 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1127 in a linker script.
1128
1129 @kindex -v
1130 @kindex -V
1131 @kindex --version
1132 @cindex version
1133 @item -v
1134 @itemx --version
1135 @itemx -V
1136 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1137 lists the supported emulations.
1138
1139 @kindex -x
1140 @kindex --discard-all
1141 @cindex deleting local symbols
1142 @item -x
1143 @itemx --discard-all
1144 Delete all local symbols.
1145
1146 @kindex -X
1147 @kindex --discard-locals
1148 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1149 @item -X
1150 @itemx --discard-locals
1151 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1152 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1153 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1154
1155 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1156 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1157 @cindex symbol tracing
1158 @item -y @var{symbol}
1159 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1160 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1161 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1162 to prepend an underscore.
1163
1164 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1165 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1166
1167 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1168 @item -Y @var{path}
1169 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1170 for Solaris compatibility.
1171
1172 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1173 @item -z @var{keyword}
1174 The recognized keywords are:
1175 @table @samp
1176
1177 @item bndplt
1178 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1179
1180 @item call-nop=prefix-addr
1181 @itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1182 @itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1183 @itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1184 Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1185 to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1186 @option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1187 @option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1188 @option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1189 @option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1190 Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1191
1192 @item cet-report=none
1193 @itemx cet-report=warning
1194 @itemx cet-report=error
1195 Specify how to report the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT and
1196 GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK properties in input .note.gnu.property
1197 section. @option{cet-report=none}, which is the default, will make the
1198 linker not report missing properties in input files.
1199 @option{cet-report=warning} will make the linker issue a warning for
1200 missing properties in input files. @option{cet-report=error} will make
1201 the linker issue an error for missing properties in input files.
1202 Note that @option{ibt} will turn off the missing
1203 GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT property report and @option{shstk} will
1204 turn off the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK property report.
1205 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1206
1207 @item combreloc
1208 @itemx nocombreloc
1209 Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1210 dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
1211
1212 @item common
1213 @itemx nocommon
1214 Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1215 link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1216
1217 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1218 Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1219 layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1220 using pages of this size.
1221
1222 @item defs
1223 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1224 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1225 This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
1226
1227 @item dynamic-undefined-weak
1228 @itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1229 Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1230 if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1231 by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1232 @samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1233 may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1234 selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1235 these options.
1236
1237 @item execstack
1238 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1239
1240 @item global
1241 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1242 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1243 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1244
1245 @item globalaudit
1246 This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1247 This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1248 setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1249 tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
1250 the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command-line options be run for
1251 all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
1252
1253 @item ibtplt
1254 Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1255 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1256
1257 @item ibt
1258 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1259 to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1260 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1261
1262 @item initfirst
1263 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1264 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1265 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1266 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1267 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1268 objects.
1269
1270 @item interpose
1271 Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1272 so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1273 libraries not so marked.
1274
1275 @item lazy
1276 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1277 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1278 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1279 Lazy binding is the default.
1280
1281 @item loadfltr
1282 Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
1283
1284 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1285 Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
1286
1287 @item muldefs
1288 Allow multiple definitions.
1289
1290 @item nocopyreloc
1291 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1292 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1293
1294 @item nodefaultlib
1295 Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1296 should ignore any default library search paths.
1297
1298 @item nodelete
1299 Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1300
1301 @item nodlopen
1302 Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
1303
1304 @item nodump
1305 Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1306
1307 @item noexecstack
1308 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1309
1310 @item noextern-protected-data
1311 Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1312 library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1313 used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1314 generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1315 module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1316 i386 and x86-64.
1317
1318 @item noreloc-overflow
1319 Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1320 relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1321 overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1322
1323 @item now
1324 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1325 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1326 when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1327 function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1328 called.
1329
1330 @item origin
1331 Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
1332
1333 @item relro
1334 @itemx norelro
1335 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1336 specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1337 relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1338 than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
1339 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
1340
1341 @item separate-code
1342 @itemx noseparate-code
1343 Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1344 specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1345 be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1346 code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1347
1348 @item shstk
1349 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1350 to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1351 Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1352
1353 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1354 Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1355 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1356 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1357
1358 @item text
1359 @itemx notext
1360 @itemx textoff
1361 Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the binary has dynamic
1362 relocations in read-only sections. Don't report an error if
1363 @samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
1364
1365 @item undefs
1366 Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1367 either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1368 This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1369
1370 @end table
1371
1372 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1373
1374 @kindex -(
1375 @cindex groups of archives
1376 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1377 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1378 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1379 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1380
1381 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1382 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1383 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1384 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1385 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1386 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1387 they will all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1388 resolved.
1389
1390 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1391 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1392 more archives.
1393
1394 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1395 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1396 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1397 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1398 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1399 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1400 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1401 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1402 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1403 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1404 restore the old behaviour.
1405
1406 @kindex --as-needed
1407 @kindex --no-as-needed
1408 @item --as-needed
1409 @itemx --no-as-needed
1410 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1411 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1412 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1413 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1414 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1415 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1416 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1417 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1418 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1419 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1420 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1421 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1422 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1423
1424 @kindex --add-needed
1425 @kindex --no-add-needed
1426 @item --add-needed
1427 @itemx --no-add-needed
1428 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1429 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1430 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1431 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1432
1433 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1434 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1435 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1436
1437 @kindex -Bdynamic
1438 @kindex -dy
1439 @kindex -call_shared
1440 @item -Bdynamic
1441 @itemx -dy
1442 @itemx -call_shared
1443 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1444 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1445 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1446 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1447 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1448 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1449
1450 @kindex -Bgroup
1451 @item -Bgroup
1452 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1453 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1454 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1455 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1456 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1457
1458 @kindex -Bstatic
1459 @kindex -dn
1460 @kindex -non_shared
1461 @kindex -static
1462 @item -Bstatic
1463 @itemx -dn
1464 @itemx -non_shared
1465 @itemx -static
1466 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1467 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1468 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1469 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1470 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1471 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1472 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1473 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1474 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1475 libraries.
1476
1477 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1478 @item -Bsymbolic
1479 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1480 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1481 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1482 within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1483 platforms which support shared libraries.
1484
1485 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1486 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1487 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1488 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1489 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1490 libraries.
1491
1492 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1493 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1494 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1495 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1496 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1497 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1498 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1499 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1500 which support shared libraries.
1501
1502 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1503 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1504
1505 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1506 @item --dynamic-list-data
1507 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1508
1509 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1510 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1511 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1512 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1513
1514 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1515 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1516 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1517
1518 @kindex --check-sections
1519 @kindex --no-check-sections
1520 @item --check-sections
1521 @itemx --no-check-sections
1522 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1523 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1524 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1525 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1526 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1527 restored by using the command-line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1528 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1529 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1530 option.
1531
1532 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1533 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1534 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1535 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1536 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1537 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1538 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1539 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1540 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1541 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1542 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1543 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1544
1545 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1546 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1547 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1548 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1549 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1550 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1551 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1552 symbols.
1553
1554 @cindex cross reference table
1555 @kindex --cref
1556 @item --cref
1557 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1558 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1559 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1560
1561 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1562 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1563 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1564 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1565 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1566 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1567 symbol are listed.
1568
1569 @cindex common allocation
1570 @kindex --no-define-common
1571 @item --no-define-common
1572 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1573 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1574 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1575
1576 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1577 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1578 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1579 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1580 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1581 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1582 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1583 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1584 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1585 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1586
1587 @cindex group allocation in linker script
1588 @cindex section groups
1589 @cindex COMDAT
1590 @kindex --force-group-allocation
1591 @item --force-group-allocation
1592 This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1593 normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1594 default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1595 change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1596 command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1597 effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1598
1599 @cindex symbols, from command line
1600 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1601 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1602 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1603 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1604 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1605 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1606 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1607 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1608 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1609 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1610 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1611 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1612
1613 @cindex demangling, from command line
1614 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1615 @kindex --no-demangle
1616 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1617 @itemx --no-demangle
1618 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1619 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1620 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1621 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1622 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1623 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1624 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1625 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1626 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1627
1628 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1629 @kindex -I@var{file}
1630 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1631 @item -I@var{file}
1632 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1633 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1634 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1635 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1636 doing.
1637
1638 @kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1639 @item --no-dynamic-linker
1640 When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1641 linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1642 executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1643 entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1644
1645 @kindex --embedded-relocs
1646 @item --embedded-relocs
1647 This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1648 that the relocs are stored in a target-specific section. This option
1649 is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1650 targets.
1651
1652 @kindex --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1653 @item --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1654 Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included
1655 in filename invoked by -R or --just-symbols
1656
1657 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1658 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1659 @item --fatal-warnings
1660 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1661 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1662 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1663
1664 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1665 @item --force-exe-suffix
1666 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1667
1668 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1669 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1670 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1671 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1672 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1673 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1674
1675 @kindex --gc-sections
1676 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1677 @cindex garbage collection
1678 @item --gc-sections
1679 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1680 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1681 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1682 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1683 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1684 collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1685 implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1686
1687 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1688 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1689 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1690 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1691 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1692 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1693 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1694 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1695 relocations. See @samp{--entry}, @samp{--undefined}, and
1696 @samp{--gc-keep-exported}.
1697
1698 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1699 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1700 specified either by one of the options @samp{--entry},
1701 @samp{--undefined}, or @samp{--gc-keep-exported} or by a @code{ENTRY}
1702 command in the linker script.
1703
1704 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1705 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1706 @cindex garbage collection
1707 @item --print-gc-sections
1708 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1709 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1710 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1711 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1712 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1713 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1714 line.
1715
1716 @kindex --gc-keep-exported
1717 @cindex garbage collection
1718 @item --gc-keep-exported
1719 When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1720 collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1721 default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1722 executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1723 collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1724 Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1725 it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1726 ELF format targets.
1727
1728 @kindex --print-output-format
1729 @cindex output format
1730 @item --print-output-format
1731 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1732 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1733 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1734
1735 @kindex --print-memory-usage
1736 @cindex memory usage
1737 @item --print-memory-usage
1738 Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1739 the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1740 quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1741 headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1742 parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1743
1744 @smallexample
1745 Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1746 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1747 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1748 @end smallexample
1749
1750 @cindex help
1751 @cindex usage
1752 @kindex --help
1753 @item --help
1754 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1755
1756 @kindex --target-help
1757 @item --target-help
1758 Print a summary of all target-specific options on the standard output and exit.
1759
1760 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1761 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1762 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1763 @option{-M} option, above.
1764
1765 @cindex memory usage
1766 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1767 @item --no-keep-memory
1768 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1769 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1770 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1771 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1772 while linking a large executable.
1773
1774 @kindex --no-undefined
1775 @kindex -z defs
1776 @kindex -z undefs
1777 @item --no-undefined
1778 @itemx -z defs
1779 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1780 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1781 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1782 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1783 libraries being linked in.
1784
1785 The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1786
1787 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1788 @kindex -z muldefs
1789 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1790 @itemx -z muldefs
1791 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1792 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1793 first definition will be used.
1794
1795 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1796 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1797 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1798 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1799 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1800 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1801 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1802 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1803 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1804
1805 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1806 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1807 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1808 a shared library.
1809
1810 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1811 libraries specified at link time are that:
1812
1813 @itemize @bullet
1814 @item
1815 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1816 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1817 resolvable at load time.
1818 @item
1819 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1820 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1821
1822 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1823 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1824 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1825 appropriate memset function.
1826 @end itemize
1827
1828 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1829 @item --no-undefined-version
1830 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1831 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1832 will be issued instead.
1833
1834 @kindex --default-symver
1835 @item --default-symver
1836 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1837 exported symbols.
1838
1839 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1840 @item --default-imported-symver
1841 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1842 imported symbols.
1843
1844 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1845 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1846 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1847 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1848 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1849 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1850 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1851 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1852 inappropriate.
1853
1854 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1855 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1856 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1857 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1858
1859 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1860 @item --no-whole-archive
1861 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1862 archive files.
1863
1864 @cindex output file after errors
1865 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1866 @item --noinhibit-exec
1867 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1868 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1869 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1870 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1871
1872 @kindex -nostdlib
1873 @item -nostdlib
1874 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1875 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1876 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1877
1878 @ifclear SingleFormat
1879 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1880 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1881 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1882 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1883 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1884 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1885 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1886 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1887 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1888 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1889 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1890 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1891 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1892 @end ifclear
1893
1894 @kindex --out-implib
1895 @item --out-implib @var{file}
1896 Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1897 the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1898 library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1899 may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1900 behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1901 step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1902 the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1903
1904 @kindex -pie
1905 @kindex --pic-executable
1906 @item -pie
1907 @itemx --pic-executable
1908 @cindex position independent executables
1909 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1910 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1911 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1912 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1913 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1914 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1915
1916 @kindex -qmagic
1917 @item -qmagic
1918 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1919
1920 @kindex -Qy
1921 @item -Qy
1922 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1923
1924 @kindex --relax
1925 @cindex synthesizing linker
1926 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1927 @cindex --no-relax
1928 @item --relax
1929 @itemx --no-relax
1930 An option with machine dependent effects.
1931 @ifset GENERIC
1932 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1933 @end ifset
1934 @ifset H8300
1935 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1936 @end ifset
1937 @ifset XTENSA
1938 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1939 @end ifset
1940 @ifset M68HC11
1941 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1942 @end ifset
1943 @ifset NIOSII
1944 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1945 @end ifset
1946 @ifset POWERPC
1947 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1948 @end ifset
1949
1950 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target-specific,
1951 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1952 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1953 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1954 instructions, and combining constant values.
1955
1956 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1957 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1958 @ifset GENERIC
1959 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1960 family of processors.
1961 @end ifset
1962
1963 @ifset GENERIC
1964 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1965 but ignored.
1966 @end ifset
1967
1968 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1969 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1970
1971 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1972 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1973 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1974 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1975 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1976 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1977 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1978 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1979 @ifset GENERIC
1980 (such as VxWorks)
1981 @end ifset
1982 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1983 run-time memory.
1984
1985 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1986 or symbols needed for relocations.
1987
1988 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1989 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1990
1991 @ifset GENERIC
1992 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1993 @cindex runtime library search path
1994 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1995 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1996 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1997 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1998 them to locate shared objects at runtime.
1999
2000 The @option{-rpath} option is also used when locating shared objects which
2001 are needed by shared objects explicitly included in the link; see the
2002 description of the @option{-rpath-link} option. Searching @option{-rpath}
2003 in this way is only supported by native linkers and cross linkers which
2004 have been configured with the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
2005
2006 If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an ELF executable, the
2007 contents of the environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it
2008 is defined.
2009
2010 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
2011 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
2012 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
2013 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
2014 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
2015 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
2016 file systems.
2017
2018 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
2019 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
2020 the @option{-rpath} option.
2021 @end ifset
2022
2023 @ifset GENERIC
2024 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
2025 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
2026 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
2027 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
2028 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
2029 of the input files.
2030
2031 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
2032 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
2033 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
2034 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
2035 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
2036 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
2037 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
2038 appearing multiple times.
2039
2040 The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
2041 directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
2042 containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
2043 and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
2044 64-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
2045
2046 The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
2047 @var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
2048 supported.
2049
2050 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
2051 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
2052 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
2053 runtime linker would do.
2054
2055 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
2056 libraries:
2057
2058 @enumerate
2059 @item
2060 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
2061 @item
2062 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
2063 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
2064 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
2065 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
2066 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
2067 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
2068 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
2069 @item
2070 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
2071 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
2072 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
2073 @item
2074 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
2075 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
2076 @item
2077 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
2078 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
2079 @item
2080 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
2081 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
2082 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
2083 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
2084 @item
2085 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
2086 @item
2087 For a linker for a Linux system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
2088 exists, the list of directories found in that file. Note: the path
2089 to this file is prefixed with the @code{sysroot} value, if that is
2090 defined, and then any @code{prefix} string if the linker was
2091 configured with the @command{--prefix=<path>} option.
2092 @item
2093 For a native linker on a FreeBSD system, any directories specified by
2094 the @code{_PATH_ELF_HINTS} macro defined in the @file{elf-hints.h}
2095 header file.
2096 @item
2097 Any directories specifed by a @code{SEARCH_DIR} command in the
2098 linker script being used.
2099 @end enumerate
2100
2101 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
2102 warning and continue with the link.
2103 @end ifset
2104
2105 @kindex -shared
2106 @kindex -Bshareable
2107 @item -shared
2108 @itemx -Bshareable
2109 @cindex shared libraries
2110 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2111 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
2112 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
2113 undefined symbols in the link.
2114
2115 @kindex --sort-common
2116 @item --sort-common
2117 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
2118 @itemx --sort-common=descending
2119 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2120 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2121 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2122 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2123 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2124 specified, then descending order is assumed.
2125
2126 @kindex --sort-section=name
2127 @item --sort-section=name
2128 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2129 patterns in the linker script.
2130
2131 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
2132 @item --sort-section=alignment
2133 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2134 patterns in the linker script.
2135
2136 @kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2137 @item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2138 This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2139 .dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2140 post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2141
2142 @kindex --split-by-file
2143 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
2144 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
2145 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2146 size of 1 if not given.
2147
2148 @kindex --split-by-reloc
2149 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
2150 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
2151 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
2152 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
2153 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2154 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2155 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2156 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2157 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2158 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
2159 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
2160
2161 @kindex --stats
2162 @item --stats
2163 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2164 as execution time and memory usage.
2165
2166 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
2167 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2168 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2169 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2170 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2171
2172 @kindex --task-link
2173 @item --task-link
2174 This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2175 file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2176
2177 @kindex --traditional-format
2178 @cindex traditional format
2179 @item --traditional-format
2180 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2181 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
2182 use the traditional format instead.
2183
2184 @cindex dbx
2185 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
2186 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2187 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2188 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
2189 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
2190 combine duplicate entries.
2191
2192 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2193 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2194 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2195 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2196 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2197 line.
2198 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2199 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2200 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2201 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2202 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2203
2204 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2205 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2206 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
2207 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
2208 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
2209 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2210 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2211 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
2212 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
2213
2214 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2215 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2216 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2217 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2218 byte of the text segment.
2219
2220 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2221 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2222 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2223 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2224 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2225 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2226
2227 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2228 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2229 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2230 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2231 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2232
2233 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
2234 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2235 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2236 values for @samp{method}:
2237
2238 @table @samp
2239 @item ignore-all
2240 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
2241
2242 @item report-all
2243 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
2244
2245 @item ignore-in-object-files
2246 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2247 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2248
2249 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
2250 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2251 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2252 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2253 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2254 command line.
2255 @end table
2256
2257 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2258 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2259
2260 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2261 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2262 can change this to a warning.
2263
2264 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2265 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2266 @item --dll-verbose
2267 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2268 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
2269 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
2270 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2271 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
2272
2273 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2274 @cindex version script, symbol versions
2275 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2276 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2277 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
2278 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
2279 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2280 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2281 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2282 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2283 @xref{WIN32}.
2284
2285 @kindex --warn-common
2286 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2287 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2288 @item --warn-common
2289 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
2290 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
2291 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2292 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
2293 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
2294 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2295
2296 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2297
2298 @table @samp
2299 @item int i = 1;
2300 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2301 file.
2302
2303 @item extern int i;
2304 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2305 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2306 variable somewhere.
2307
2308 @item int i;
2309 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2310 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2311 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2312 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2313 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2314 a definition of the same variable.
2315 @end table
2316
2317 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2318 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2319 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2320 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2321 a common symbol.
2322
2323 @enumerate
2324 @item
2325 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2326 definition for the symbol.
2327 @smallexample
2328 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2329 overridden by definition
2330 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2331 @end smallexample
2332
2333 @item
2334 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2335 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2336 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2337 @smallexample
2338 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2339 overriding common
2340 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2341 @end smallexample
2342
2343 @item
2344 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2345 @smallexample
2346 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2347 of `@var{symbol}'
2348 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2349 @end smallexample
2350
2351 @item
2352 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2353 @smallexample
2354 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2355 overridden by larger common
2356 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2357 @end smallexample
2358
2359 @item
2360 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2361 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2362 encountered in a different order.
2363 @smallexample
2364 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2365 overriding smaller common
2366 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2367 @end smallexample
2368 @end enumerate
2369
2370 @kindex --warn-constructors
2371 @item --warn-constructors
2372 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2373 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2374 detect the use of global constructors.
2375
2376 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2377 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2378 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2379 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2380 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2381 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2382 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2383 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2384 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2385 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2386 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2387 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2388 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2389
2390 @kindex --warn-once
2391 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2392 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2393 @item --warn-once
2394 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2395 which refers to it.
2396
2397 @kindex --warn-section-align
2398 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2399 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2400 @item --warn-section-align
2401 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2402 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2403 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2404 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2405 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2406
2407 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2408 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2409 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2410
2411 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2412 @item --warn-alternate-em
2413 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2414
2415 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2416 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2417 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2418 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2419 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2420
2421 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2422 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2423 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2424 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2425
2426 @kindex --whole-archive
2427 @cindex including an entire archive
2428 @item --whole-archive
2429 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2430 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2431 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2432 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2433 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2434 library. This option may be used more than once.
2435
2436 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2437 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2438 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2439 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2440 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2441
2442 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2443 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2444 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2445 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2446 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2447 @var{symbol}.
2448
2449 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2450 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2451 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2452 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2453
2454 Here is a trivial example:
2455
2456 @smallexample
2457 void *
2458 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2459 @{
2460 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2461 return __real_malloc (c);
2462 @}
2463 @end smallexample
2464
2465 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2466 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2467 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2468 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2469
2470 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2471 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2472 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2473 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2474 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2475
2476 Only undefined references are replaced by the linker. So, translation unit
2477 internal references to @var{symbol} are not resolved to
2478 @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. In the next example, the call to @code{f} in
2479 @code{g} is not resolved to @code{__wrap_f}.
2480
2481 @smallexample
2482 int
2483 f (void)
2484 @{
2485 return 123;
2486 @}
2487
2488 int
2489 g (void)
2490 @{
2491 return f();
2492 @}
2493 @end smallexample
2494
2495 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2496 @kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
2497 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2498 @itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2499 Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2500 (@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2501 section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2502
2503 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2504 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2505 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2506 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2507 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2508
2509 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2510 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2511 @item --enable-new-dtags
2512 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2513 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2514 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2515 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2516 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2517 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2518 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2519 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2520
2521 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2522 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2523 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2524 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2525 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2526 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2527 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2528
2529 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2530 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2531 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2532 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2533 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2534 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2535 hash tables. The default depends upon how the linker was configured,
2536 but for most Linux based systems it will be @code{both}.
2537
2538 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2539 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2540 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2541 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2542 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
2543 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2544 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2545 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2546 On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2547 compressed using zlib.
2548
2549 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2550 sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2551 DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2552 instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2553 also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2554 sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2555
2556 The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2557 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2558
2559 Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2560 sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2561 for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2562 uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2563
2564 The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2565 involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2566 default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2567 @option{--help} option.
2568
2569 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2570 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2571 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2572 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2573 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2574 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2575
2576 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2577 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2578 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2579 has been used.
2580
2581 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2582 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2583
2584 @kindex --build-id
2585 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2586 @item --build-id
2587 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2588 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2589 or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2590 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2591 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2592 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2593 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2594 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2595 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2596 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2597 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2598
2599 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2600 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2601 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2602 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2603 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2604 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2605
2606 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2607 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2608 @end table
2609
2610 @c man end
2611
2612 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2613
2614 @c man begin OPTIONS
2615
2616 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2617 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2618 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2619 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2620 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2621 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2622 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2623 object file).
2624
2625 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2626 support additional command-line options that are specific to the i386
2627 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2628 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2629
2630 @table @gcctabopt
2631
2632 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2633 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2634 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2635 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2636 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2637
2638 @kindex --base-file
2639 @item --base-file @var{file}
2640 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2641 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2642 @file{dlltool}.
2643 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2644
2645 @kindex --dll
2646 @item --dll
2647 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2648 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2649 file.
2650 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2651
2652 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2653 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2654 @item --enable-long-section-names
2655 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2656 The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
2657 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2658 for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2659 fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
2660 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2661 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2662 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2663 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2664 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2665 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2666 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2667 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2668 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2669 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2670 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2671 image and not stripping symbols.
2672 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2673
2674 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2675 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2676 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2677 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2678 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2679 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2680 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2681 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2682 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2683 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2684 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2685 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2686 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2687 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2688 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2689 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2690 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2691 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2692
2693 @kindex --leading-underscore
2694 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2695 @item --leading-underscore
2696 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2697 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2698 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2699 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2700
2701 @cindex DLLs, creating
2702 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2703 @item --export-all-symbols
2704 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2705 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2706 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2707 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2708 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2709 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2710 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2711 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2712 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2713 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2714 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2715 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2716 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2717 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2718 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2719 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2720 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2721 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2722 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2723 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2724 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2725 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2726 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2727
2728 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2729 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2730 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2731 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2732 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2733
2734 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2735 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2736 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2737 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2738
2739 @kindex --file-alignment
2740 @item --file-alignment
2741 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2742 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2743 512.
2744 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2745
2746 @cindex heap size
2747 @kindex --heap
2748 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2749 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2750 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2751 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2752 committed.
2753 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2754
2755 @cindex image base
2756 @kindex --image-base
2757 @item --image-base @var{value}
2758 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2759 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2760 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2761 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2762 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2763 for dlls.
2764 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2765
2766 @kindex --kill-at
2767 @item --kill-at
2768 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2769 symbols before they are exported.
2770 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2771
2772 @kindex --large-address-aware
2773 @item --large-address-aware
2774 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2775 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2776 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2777 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2778 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2779 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2780
2781 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2782 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2783 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2784 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2785 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2786 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2787 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2788
2789 @kindex --major-image-version
2790 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2791 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2792 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2793
2794 @kindex --major-os-version
2795 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2796 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2797 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2798
2799 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2800 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2801 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2802 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2803
2804 @kindex --minor-image-version
2805 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2806 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2807 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2808
2809 @kindex --minor-os-version
2810 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2811 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2812 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2813
2814 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2815 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2816 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2817 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2818
2819 @cindex DEF files, creating
2820 @cindex DLLs, creating
2821 @kindex --output-def
2822 @item --output-def @var{file}
2823 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2824 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2825 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2826 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2827 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2828 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2829
2830 @cindex DLLs, creating
2831 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2832 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2833 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2834 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2835 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2836 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2837 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2838 execution are avoided.
2839 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2840
2841 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2842 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2843 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2844 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2845 default.
2846 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2847
2848 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2849 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2850 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2851 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2852 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2853 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2854 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2855 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2856 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2857 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2858
2859 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2860 @item --enable-auto-import
2861 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2862 DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2863 mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2864 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2865
2866 The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2867 feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2868
2869 Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2870 of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2871 PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
2872
2873 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2874 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2875 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2876 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2877 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2878
2879 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2880 see this message:
2881
2882 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2883 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2884
2885 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2886 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2887 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2888 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2889 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2890 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2891 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2892 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2893 the warning, and exit.
2894
2895 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2896 data type of the exported variable:
2897
2898 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2899 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2900 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2901
2902 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2903 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2904 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2905 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2906
2907 @example
2908 extern type extern_array[];
2909 extern_array[1] -->
2910 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2911 @end example
2912
2913 or
2914
2915 @example
2916 extern type extern_array[];
2917 extern_array[1] -->
2918 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2919 @end example
2920
2921 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2922 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2923
2924 @example
2925 extern struct s extern_struct;
2926 extern_struct.field -->
2927 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2928 @end example
2929
2930 or
2931
2932 @example
2933 extern long long extern_ll;
2934 extern_ll -->
2935 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2936 @end example
2937
2938 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2939 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2940 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2941 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2942 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2943 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2944 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2945 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2946
2947 Original:
2948 @example
2949 --foo.h
2950 extern int arr[];
2951 --foo.c
2952 #include "foo.h"
2953 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2954 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2955 @}
2956 @end example
2957
2958 Solution 1:
2959 @example
2960 --foo.h
2961 extern int arr[];
2962 --foo.c
2963 #include "foo.h"
2964 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2965 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2966 volatile int *parr = arr;
2967 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2968 @}
2969 @end example
2970
2971 Solution 2:
2972 @example
2973 --foo.h
2974 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2975 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2976 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2977 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2978 #else
2979 #define FOO_IMPORT
2980 #endif
2981 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2982 --foo.c
2983 #include "foo.h"
2984 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2985 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2986 @}
2987 @end example
2988
2989 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2990 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2991 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2992 functions).
2993
2994 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2995 @item --disable-auto-import
2996 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2997 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2998 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2999
3000 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3001 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3002 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
3003 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
3004 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
3005 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
3006 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
3007
3008 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3009 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3010 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
3011 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
3012
3013 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
3014 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
3015 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
3016 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
3017
3018 @kindex --section-alignment
3019 @item --section-alignment
3020 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
3021 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
3022 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
3023
3024 @cindex stack size
3025 @kindex --stack
3026 @item --stack @var{reserve}
3027 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
3028 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
3029 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
3030 committed.
3031 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
3032
3033 @kindex --subsystem
3034 @item --subsystem @var{which}
3035 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
3036 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
3037 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
3038 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
3039 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
3040 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
3041 @var{which}.
3042 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
3043
3044 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
3045 of the PE file header:
3046 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
3047
3048 @kindex --high-entropy-va
3049 @item --high-entropy-va
3050 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
3051 (ASLR).
3052 This option also implies @option{--dynamicbase} and
3053 @option{--enable-reloc-section}.
3054
3055 @kindex --dynamicbase
3056 @item --dynamicbase
3057 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
3058 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
3059 Vista for i386 PE targets.
3060 This option also implies @option{--enable-reloc-section}.
3061
3062 @kindex --forceinteg
3063 @item --forceinteg
3064 Code integrity checks are enforced.
3065
3066 @kindex --nxcompat
3067 @item --nxcompat
3068 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
3069 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
3070
3071 @kindex --no-isolation
3072 @item --no-isolation
3073 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
3074
3075 @kindex --no-seh
3076 @item --no-seh
3077 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
3078 this image.
3079
3080 @kindex --no-bind
3081 @item --no-bind
3082 Do not bind this image.
3083
3084 @kindex --wdmdriver
3085 @item --wdmdriver
3086 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
3087
3088 @kindex --tsaware
3089 @item --tsaware
3090 The image is Terminal Server aware.
3091
3092 @kindex --insert-timestamp
3093 @item --insert-timestamp
3094 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
3095 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
3096 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
3097 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
3098 will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
3099 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
3100 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
3101 that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
3102 identically.
3103
3104 @kindex --enable-reloc-section
3105 @item --enable-reloc-section
3106 Create the base relocation table, which is necessary if the image
3107 is loaded at a different image base than specified in the PE header.
3108 @end table
3109
3110 @c man end
3111
3112 @ifset C6X
3113 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
3114
3115 @c man begin OPTIONS
3116
3117 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
3118 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
3119 all executables use an index of 0.
3120
3121 @table @gcctabopt
3122
3123 @kindex --dsbt-size
3124 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
3125 This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
3126 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
3127 entries.
3128
3129 @kindex --dsbt-index
3130 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
3131 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
3132 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3133 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3134 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3135
3136 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3137 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3138 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3139
3140 @end table
3141
3142 @c man end
3143 @end ifset
3144
3145 @ifset CSKY
3146 @subsection Options specific to C-SKY targets
3147
3148 @c man begin OPTIONS
3149
3150 @table @gcctabopt
3151
3152 @kindex --branch-stub on C-SKY
3153 @item --branch-stub
3154 This option enables linker branch relaxation by inserting branch stub
3155 sections when needed to extend the range of branches. This option is
3156 usually not required since C-SKY supports branch and call instructions that
3157 can access the full memory range and branch relaxation is normally handled by
3158 the compiler or assembler.
3159
3160 @kindex --stub-group-size on C-SKY
3161 @item --stub-group-size=@var{N}
3162 This option allows finer control of linker branch stub creation.
3163 It sets the maximum size of a group of input sections that can
3164 be handled by one stub section. A negative value of @var{N} locates
3165 stub sections after their branches, while a positive value allows stub
3166 sections to appear either before or after the branches. Values of
3167 @samp{1} or @samp{-1} indicate that the
3168 linker should choose suitable defaults.
3169
3170 @end table
3171
3172 @c man end
3173 @end ifset
3174
3175 @ifset M68HC11
3176 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3177
3178 @c man begin OPTIONS
3179
3180 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3181 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3182
3183 @table @gcctabopt
3184
3185 @kindex --no-trampoline
3186 @item --no-trampoline
3187 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3188 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3189 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3190
3191 @kindex --bank-window
3192 @item --bank-window @var{name}
3193 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3194 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3195 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3196 paging and addresses within the memory window.
3197
3198 @end table
3199
3200 @c man end
3201 @end ifset
3202
3203 @ifset M68K
3204 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3205
3206 @c man begin OPTIONS
3207
3208 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3209 when linking for 68K targets.
3210
3211 @table @gcctabopt
3212
3213 @kindex --got
3214 @item --got=@var{type}
3215 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3216 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3217 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3218 Info entry for @file{ld}.
3219
3220 @end table
3221
3222 @c man end
3223 @end ifset
3224
3225 @ifset MIPS
3226 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3227
3228 @c man begin OPTIONS
3229
3230 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
3231 generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3232 linking for MIPS targets.
3233
3234 @table @gcctabopt
3235
3236 @kindex --insn32
3237 @item --insn32
3238 @kindex --no-insn32
3239 @itemx --no-insn32
3240 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3241 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3242 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
3243 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3244 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3245 possible.
3246
3247 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3248 @item --ignore-branch-isa
3249 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3250 @itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3251 These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3252 transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3253 accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3254 is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3255 instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3256 equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3257 calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3258 a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3259 an error.
3260
3261 @kindex --compact-branches
3262 @item --compact-branches
3263 @kindex --no-compact-branches
3264 @itemx --no-compact-branches
3265 These options control the generation of compact instructions by the linker
3266 in the PLT entries for MIPS R6.
3267
3268 @end table
3269
3270 @c man end
3271 @end ifset
3272
3273
3274 @ifset PDP11
3275 @subsection Options specific to PDP11 targets
3276
3277 @c man begin OPTIONS
3278
3279 For the pdp11-aout target, three variants of the output format can be
3280 produced as selected by the following options. The default variant
3281 for pdp11-aout is the @samp{--omagic} option, whereas for other
3282 targets @samp{--nmagic} is the default. The @samp{--imagic} option is
3283 defined only for the pdp11-aout target, while the others are described
3284 here as they apply to the pdp11-aout target.
3285
3286 @table @gcctabopt
3287
3288 @kindex -N
3289 @item -N
3290 @kindex --omagic
3291 @itemx --omagic
3292
3293 Mark the output as @code{OMAGIC} (0407) in the @file{a.out} header to
3294 indicate that the text segment is not to be write-protected and
3295 shared. Since the text and data sections are both readable and
3296 writable, the data section is allocated immediately contiguous after
3297 the text segment. This is the oldest format for PDP11 executable
3298 programs and is the default for @command{ld} on PDP11 Unix systems
3299 from the beginning through 2.11BSD.
3300
3301 @kindex -n
3302 @item -n
3303 @kindex --nmagic
3304 @itemx --nmagic
3305
3306 Mark the output as @code{NMAGIC} (0410) in the @file{a.out} header to
3307 indicate that when the output file is executed, the text portion will
3308 be read-only and shareable among all processes executing the same
3309 file. This involves moving the data areas up to the first possible 8K
3310 byte page boundary following the end of the text. This option creates
3311 a @emph{pure executable} format.
3312
3313 @kindex -z
3314 @item -z
3315 @kindex --imagic
3316 @itemx --imagic
3317
3318 Mark the output as @code{IMAGIC} (0411) in the @file{a.out} header to
3319 indicate that when the output file is executed, the program text and
3320 data areas will be loaded into separate address spaces using the split
3321 instruction and data space feature of the memory management unit in
3322 larger models of the PDP11. This doubles the address space available
3323 to the program. The text segment is again pure, write-protected, and
3324 shareable. The only difference in the output format between this
3325 option and the others, besides the magic number, is that both the text
3326 and data sections start at location 0. The @samp{-z} option selected
3327 this format in 2.11BSD. This option creates a @emph{separate
3328 executable} format.
3329
3330 @kindex --no-omagic
3331 @item --no-omagic
3332
3333 Equivalent to @samp{--nmagic} for pdp11-aout.
3334
3335 @end table
3336
3337 @c man end
3338 @end ifset
3339
3340 @ifset UsesEnvVars
3341 @node Environment
3342 @section Environment Variables
3343
3344 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3345
3346 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
3347 @ifclear SingleFormat
3348 @code{GNUTARGET},
3349 @end ifclear
3350 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
3351
3352 @ifclear SingleFormat
3353 @kindex GNUTARGET
3354 @cindex default input format
3355 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3356 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3357 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
3358 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
3359 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3360 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3361 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3362 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3363 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3364 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3365 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
3366 @end ifclear
3367
3368 @kindex LDEMULATION
3369 @cindex default emulation
3370 @cindex emulation, default
3371 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3372 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3373 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3374 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3375 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3376 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3377 linker was configured.
3378
3379 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3380 @cindex demangling, default
3381 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3382 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3383 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3384 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3385 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3386 options.
3387
3388 @c man end
3389 @end ifset
3390
3391 @node Scripts
3392 @chapter Linker Scripts
3393
3394 @cindex scripts
3395 @cindex linker scripts
3396 @cindex command files
3397 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3398 written in the linker command language.
3399
3400 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3401 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3402 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3403 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3404 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3405 described below.
3406
3407 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3408 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3409 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command-line option
3410 to display the default linker script. Certain command-line options,
3411 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3412
3413 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3414 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3415 default linker script.
3416
3417 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3418 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3419 Linker Scripts}.
3420
3421 @menu
3422 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3423 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3424 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3425 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3426 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3427 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3428 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3429 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3430 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
3431 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3432 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3433 @end menu
3434
3435 @node Basic Script Concepts
3436 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3437 @cindex linker script concepts
3438 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3439 describe the linker script language.
3440
3441 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3442 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3443 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3444 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3445 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3446 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3447 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3448 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3449
3450 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3451 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3452 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3453 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3454 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3455 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3456 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3457 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3458 of debugging information.
3459
3460 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3461 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3462 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3463 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3464 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3465 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3466 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3467 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3468 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3469 RAM address would be the VMA.
3470
3471 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3472 program with the @samp{-h} option.
3473
3474 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3475 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3476 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3477 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3478 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3479 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3480 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3481
3482 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3483 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3484 option.
3485
3486 @node Script Format
3487 @section Linker Script Format
3488 @cindex linker script format
3489 Linker scripts are text files.
3490
3491 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3492 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3493 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3494 generally ignored.
3495
3496 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3497 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3498 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3499 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3500 file name.
3501
3502 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3503 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3504 to whitespace.
3505
3506 @node Simple Example
3507 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3508 @cindex linker script example
3509 @cindex example of linker script
3510 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3511
3512 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3513 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3514 memory layout of the output file.
3515
3516 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3517 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3518 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3519 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3520 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3521 your input files.
3522
3523 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3524 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3525 linker script which will do that:
3526 @smallexample
3527 SECTIONS
3528 @{
3529 . = 0x10000;
3530 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3531 . = 0x8000000;
3532 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3533 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3534 @}
3535 @end smallexample
3536
3537 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3538 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3539 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3540
3541 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3542 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3543 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3544 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3545 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3546 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3547 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3548
3549 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3550 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3551 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3552 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3553 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3554 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3555
3556 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3557 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3558 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3559
3560 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3561 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3562 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3563 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3564 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3565 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3566 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3567
3568 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3569 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3570 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3571 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3572 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3573 sections.
3574
3575 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3576
3577 @node Simple Commands
3578 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3579 @cindex linker script simple commands
3580 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3581
3582 @menu
3583 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3584 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3585 @ifclear SingleFormat
3586 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3587 @end ifclear
3588
3589 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3590 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3591 @end menu
3592
3593 @node Entry Point
3594 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3595 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3596 @cindex start of execution
3597 @cindex first instruction
3598 @cindex entry point
3599 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3600 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3601 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3602 @smallexample
3603 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3604 @end smallexample
3605
3606 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3607 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3608 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3609 @itemize @bullet
3610 @item
3611 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3612 @item
3613 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3614 @item
3615 the value of a target-specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3616 targets this is @code{start}, but PE- and BeOS-based systems for example
3617 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3618 @item
3619 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3620 @item
3621 The address @code{0}.
3622 @end itemize
3623
3624 @node File Commands
3625 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3626 @cindex linker script file commands
3627 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3628
3629 @table @code
3630 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3631 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3632 @cindex including a linker script
3633 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3634 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3635 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3636 10 levels deep.
3637
3638 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3639 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3640
3641 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3642 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3643 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3644 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3645 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3646 @cindex linker script input object files
3647 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3648 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3649
3650 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3651 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3652 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3653
3654 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3655 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3656
3657 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3658 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3659 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3660 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3661 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3662 linker will search through the archive library search path.
3663 The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3664 as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3665 path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
3666 @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
3667
3668 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3669 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command-line argument
3670 @samp{-l}.
3671
3672 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3673 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3674 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3675
3676 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3677 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3678 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3679 @cindex grouping input files
3680 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3681 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3682 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3683 in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
3684
3685 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3686 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3687 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3688 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3689 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3690 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3691 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3692 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3693 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3694 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3695 setting afterwards.
3696
3697 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3698 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3699 @cindex output file name in linker script
3700 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3701 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3702 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3703 Line Options}). If both are used, the command-line option takes
3704 precedence.
3705
3706 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3707 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3708
3709 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3710 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3711 @cindex library search path in linker script
3712 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3713 @cindex search path in linker script
3714 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3715 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3716 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3717 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both
3718 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3719 the command-line option are searched first.
3720
3721 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3722 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3723 @cindex first input file
3724 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3725 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3726 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3727 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3728 first file.
3729 @end table
3730
3731 @ifclear SingleFormat
3732 @node Format Commands
3733 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3734 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3735
3736 @table @code
3737 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3738 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3739 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3740 @cindex output file format in linker script
3741 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3742 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3743 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3744 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both are used, the command
3745 line option takes precedence.
3746
3747 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3748 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command-line options.
3749 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3750 desired endianness.
3751
3752 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3753 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3754 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3755 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3756
3757 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3758 command:
3759 @smallexample
3760 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3761 @end smallexample
3762 This says that the default format for the output file is
3763 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command-line
3764 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3765 format.
3766
3767 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3768 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3769 @cindex input file format in linker script
3770 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3771 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3772 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3773 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3774 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3775 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3776 @end table
3777 @end ifclear
3778
3779 @node REGION_ALIAS
3780 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3781 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3782 @cindex region alias
3783 @cindex region names
3784
3785 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3786 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3787
3788 @smallexample
3789 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3790 @end smallexample
3791
3792 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3793 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3794 to memory regions. An example follows.
3795
3796 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3797 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3798 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3799 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3800 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3801 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3802 sections:
3803
3804 @itemize @bullet
3805 @item
3806 @code{.text} program code;
3807 @item
3808 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3809 @item
3810 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3811 @item
3812 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3813 @end itemize
3814
3815 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3816 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3817 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3818 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3819 @code{C}:
3820 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3821 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3822 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3823 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3824 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3825 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3826 @end multitable
3827 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3828 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3829 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3830 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3831
3832 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3833 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3834 memory layout:
3835 @smallexample
3836 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3837
3838 SECTIONS
3839 @{
3840 .text :
3841 @{
3842 *(.text)
3843 @} > REGION_TEXT
3844 .rodata :
3845 @{
3846 *(.rodata)
3847 rodata_end = .;
3848 @} > REGION_RODATA
3849 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3850 @{
3851 data_start = .;
3852 *(.data)
3853 @} > REGION_DATA
3854 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3855 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3856 .bss :
3857 @{
3858 *(.bss)
3859 @} > REGION_BSS
3860 @}
3861 @end smallexample
3862
3863 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3864 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3865 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3866 @table @code
3867 @item A
3868 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3869 @smallexample
3870 MEMORY
3871 @{
3872 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3873 @}
3874
3875 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3876 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3877 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3878 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3879 @end smallexample
3880 @item B
3881 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3882 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3883 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3884 @smallexample
3885 MEMORY
3886 @{
3887 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3888 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3889 @}
3890
3891 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3892 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3893 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3894 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3895 @end smallexample
3896 @item C
3897 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3898 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3899 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3900 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3901 @smallexample
3902 MEMORY
3903 @{
3904 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3905 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3906 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3907 @}
3908
3909 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3910 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3911 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3912 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3913 @end smallexample
3914 @end table
3915
3916 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3917 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3918 necessary:
3919 @smallexample
3920 #include <string.h>
3921
3922 extern char data_start [];
3923 extern char data_size [];
3924 extern char data_load_start [];
3925
3926 void copy_data(void)
3927 @{
3928 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3929 @{
3930 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3931 @}
3932 @}
3933 @end smallexample
3934
3935 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3936 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3937 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3938
3939 @table @code
3940 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3941 @kindex ASSERT
3942 @cindex assertion in linker script
3943 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3944 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3945
3946 Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3947 take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3948 inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3949 for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3950 symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3951
3952 @smallexample
3953 .stack :
3954 @{
3955 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3956 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3957 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3958 @}
3959 @end smallexample
3960
3961 will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3962 PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3963 can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3964
3965 @smallexample
3966 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3967 .stack :
3968 @{
3969 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3970 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3971 @}
3972 @end smallexample
3973
3974 will work.
3975
3976 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3977 @kindex EXTERN
3978 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3979 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3980 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3981 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3982 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3983 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3984
3985 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3986 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3987 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3988 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3989 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3990 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3991
3992 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3993 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3994 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3995 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3996 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3997 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3998
3999 @item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
4000 @kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
4001 @cindex group allocation in linker script
4002 @cindex section groups
4003 @cindex COMDAT
4004 This command has the same effect as the
4005 @samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
4006 @command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
4007 and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
4008 specified (@samp{-r}).
4009
4010 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
4011 @kindex INSERT
4012 @cindex insert user script into default script
4013 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
4014 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
4015 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
4016 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
4017 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
4018 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
4019 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
4020 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
4021 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
4022 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
4023 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
4024 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
4025 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
4026
4027 @smallexample
4028 SECTIONS
4029 @{
4030 OVERLAY :
4031 @{
4032 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
4033 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
4034 @}
4035 @}
4036 INSERT AFTER .text;
4037 @end smallexample
4038
4039 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
4040 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
4041 @cindex cross references
4042 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
4043 references among certain output sections.
4044
4045 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
4046 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
4047 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
4048 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
4049 a function defined in the other section.
4050
4051 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
4052 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
4053 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
4054 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
4055 names.
4056
4057 @item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
4058 @kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
4059 @cindex cross references
4060 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
4061 references to one section from a list of other sections.
4062
4063 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
4064 output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
4065 a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
4066 there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
4067 must never call back.
4068
4069 The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
4070 The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
4071 If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
4072 the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
4073 status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
4074 names, not input section names.
4075
4076 @ifclear SingleFormat
4077 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
4078 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
4079 @cindex machine architecture
4080 @cindex architecture
4081 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
4082 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
4083 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
4084 the @samp{-f} option.
4085 @end ifclear
4086
4087 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
4088 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
4089 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
4090 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
4091 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
4092 @xref{Expression Section}.
4093 @end table
4094
4095 @node Assignments
4096 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
4097 @cindex assignment in scripts
4098 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
4099 @cindex variables, defining
4100 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
4101 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
4102
4103 @menu
4104 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
4105 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
4106 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
4107 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4108 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
4109 @end menu
4110
4111 @node Simple Assignments
4112 @subsection Simple Assignments
4113
4114 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
4115
4116 @table @code
4117 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
4118 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
4119 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
4120 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
4121 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
4122 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
4123 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
4124 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
4125 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
4126 @end table
4127
4128 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
4129 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
4130 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
4131
4132 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
4133 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
4134
4135 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
4136
4137 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
4138
4139 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
4140 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
4141 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
4142
4143 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
4144 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
4145
4146 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
4147 assignments may be used:
4148
4149 @smallexample
4150 floating_point = 0;
4151 SECTIONS
4152 @{
4153 .text :
4154 @{
4155 *(.text)
4156 _etext = .;
4157 @}
4158 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
4159 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4160 @}
4161 @end smallexample
4162 @noindent
4163 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
4164 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
4165 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
4166 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
4167 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
4168
4169 @node HIDDEN
4170 @subsection HIDDEN
4171 @cindex HIDDEN
4172 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
4173 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4174
4175 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
4176 @code{HIDDEN}:
4177
4178 @smallexample
4179 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
4180 SECTIONS
4181 @{
4182 .text :
4183 @{
4184 *(.text)
4185 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
4186 @}
4187 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
4188 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4189 @}
4190 @end smallexample
4191 @noindent
4192 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
4193
4194 @node PROVIDE
4195 @subsection PROVIDE
4196 @cindex PROVIDE
4197 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
4198 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
4199 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
4200 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
4201 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
4202 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
4203 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
4204 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4205
4206 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
4207 @smallexample
4208 SECTIONS
4209 @{
4210 .text :
4211 @{
4212 *(.text)
4213 _etext = .;
4214 PROVIDE(etext = .);
4215 @}
4216 @}
4217 @end smallexample
4218
4219 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
4220 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
4221 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
4222 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
4223 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
4224 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
4225
4226 Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
4227 defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
4228 that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
4229 when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
4230 @samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
4231
4232 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4233 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4234 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4235 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4236 hidden and won't be exported.
4237
4238 @node Source Code Reference
4239 @subsection Source Code Reference
4240
4241 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4242 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4243 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4244 symbol that does not have a value.
4245
4246 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4247 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4248 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4249 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4250 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4251 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4252 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4253 linker script variable might be referred to as:
4254
4255 @smallexample
4256 extern int foo;
4257 @end smallexample
4258
4259 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4260
4261 @smallexample
4262 _foo = 1000;
4263 @end smallexample
4264
4265 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4266 transformation has taken place.
4267
4268 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4269 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4270 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4271 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4272 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4273 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4274 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4275
4276 @smallexample
4277 int foo = 1000;
4278 @end smallexample
4279
4280 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
4281 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4282 number 1000 is initially stored.
4283
4284 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4285 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4286 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4287 So:
4288
4289 @smallexample
4290 foo = 1;
4291 @end smallexample
4292
4293 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4294 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4295 address. Whereas:
4296
4297 @smallexample
4298 int * a = & foo;
4299 @end smallexample
4300
4301 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
4302 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4303 the variable @samp{a}.
4304
4305 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4306 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4307 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4308
4309 @smallexample
4310 foo = 1000;
4311 @end smallexample
4312
4313 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4314 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4315 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4316 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4317 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4318
4319 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4320 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4321 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4322 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4323 linker script contains these declarations:
4324
4325 @smallexample
4326 @group
4327 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
4328 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
4329 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4330 @end group
4331 @end smallexample
4332
4333 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4334
4335 @smallexample
4336 @group
4337 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
4338
4339 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4340 @end group
4341 @end smallexample
4342
4343 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
4344 Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4345 arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4346
4347 @smallexample
4348 @group
4349 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4350
4351 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4352 @end group
4353 @end smallexample
4354
4355 Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4356 operators.
4357
4358 @node SECTIONS
4359 @section SECTIONS Command
4360 @kindex SECTIONS
4361 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4362 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4363
4364 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4365 @smallexample
4366 SECTIONS
4367 @{
4368 @var{sections-command}
4369 @var{sections-command}
4370 @dots{}
4371 @}
4372 @end smallexample
4373
4374 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4375
4376 @itemize @bullet
4377 @item
4378 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4379 @item
4380 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4381 @item
4382 an output section description
4383 @item
4384 an overlay description
4385 @end itemize
4386
4387 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4388 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4389 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4390 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4391 the layout of the output file.
4392
4393 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4394 below.
4395
4396 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4397 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4398 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4399 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4400 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4401 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4402
4403 @menu
4404 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
4405 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
4406 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
4407 * Input Section:: Input section description
4408 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
4409 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4410 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4411 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4412 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4413 @end menu
4414
4415 @node Output Section Description
4416 @subsection Output Section Description
4417 The full description of an output section looks like this:
4418 @smallexample
4419 @group
4420 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4421 [AT(@var{lma})]
4422 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
4423 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4424 [@var{constraint}]
4425 @{
4426 @var{output-section-command}
4427 @var{output-section-command}
4428 @dots{}
4429 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
4430 @end group
4431 @end smallexample
4432
4433 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4434
4435 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4436 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
4437 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4438 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4439 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4440
4441 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4442
4443 @itemize @bullet
4444 @item
4445 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4446 @item
4447 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4448 @item
4449 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4450 @item
4451 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4452 @end itemize
4453
4454 @node Output Section Name
4455 @subsection Output Section Name
4456 @cindex name, section
4457 @cindex section name
4458 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4459 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4460 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4461 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4462 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4463 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4464 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4465 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4466 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4467 commas must be quoted.
4468
4469 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4470 Discarding}.
4471
4472 @node Output Section Address
4473 @subsection Output Section Address
4474 @cindex address, section
4475 @cindex section address
4476 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
4477 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4478 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4479
4480 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4481 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4482 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4483 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4484 contained within the output section.
4485
4486 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4487
4488 @itemize @bullet
4489 @item
4490 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4491 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4492 in that region.
4493
4494 @item
4495 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4496 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4497 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4498 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4499
4500 @item
4501 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4502 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4503 counter.
4504 @end itemize
4505
4506 @noindent
4507 For example:
4508
4509 @smallexample
4510 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4511 @end smallexample
4512
4513 @noindent
4514 and
4515
4516 @smallexample
4517 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4518 @end smallexample
4519
4520 @noindent
4521 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4522 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4523 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4524 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4525 input sections.
4526
4527 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4528 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4529 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4530 do something like this:
4531 @smallexample
4532 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4533 @end smallexample
4534 @noindent
4535 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4536 aligned upward to the specified value.
4537
4538 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4539 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4540 sections are ignored).
4541
4542 @node Input Section
4543 @subsection Input Section Description
4544 @cindex input sections
4545 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4546 The most common output section command is an input section description.
4547
4548 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4549 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4550 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4551 map the input files into your memory layout.
4552
4553 @menu
4554 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4555 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4556 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4557 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4558 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
4559 @end menu
4560
4561 @node Input Section Basics
4562 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
4563 @cindex input section basics
4564 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4565 by a list of section names in parentheses.
4566
4567 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4568 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4569
4570 The most common input section description is to include all input
4571 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4572 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4573 @smallexample
4574 *(.text)
4575 @end smallexample
4576 @noindent
4577 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4578 @cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
4579 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4580 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4581 example:
4582 @smallexample
4583 EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4584 @end smallexample
4585 @noindent
4586 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4587 and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4588 placed inside the section list, for example:
4589 @smallexample
4590 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4591 @end smallexample
4592 @noindent
4593 The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4594 two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4595 more than one section, as described below.
4596
4597 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4598 @smallexample
4599 *(.text .rdata)
4600 *(.text) *(.rdata)
4601 @end smallexample
4602 @noindent
4603 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4604 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4605 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4606 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4607 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4608 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4609
4610 When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4611 is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4612 immediately following section, for example:
4613 @smallexample
4614 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4615 @end smallexample
4616 @noindent
4617 will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4618 @file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4619 from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4620 exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
4621 could be modified to:
4622 @smallexample
4623 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4624 @end smallexample
4625 @noindent
4626 Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4627 before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4628 all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4629 @smallexample
4630 EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4631 @end smallexample
4632
4633 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4634 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4635 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4636 @smallexample
4637 data.o(.data)
4638 @end smallexample
4639
4640 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4641 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4642
4643 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4644
4645 @smallexample
4646 @group
4647 SECTIONS @{
4648 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4649 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4650 @}
4651 @end group
4652 @end smallexample
4653
4654 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4655 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4656 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4657 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4658 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4659
4660 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4661 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4662 with no whitespace around the colon.
4663
4664 @table @samp
4665 @item archive:file
4666 matches file within archive
4667 @item archive:
4668 matches the whole archive
4669 @item :file
4670 matches file but not one in an archive
4671 @end table
4672
4673 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4674 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4675 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4676 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4677 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4678 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4679 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4680 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4681 command.
4682
4683 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4684 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4685 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4686 @smallexample
4687 data.o
4688 @end smallexample
4689
4690 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4691 and does not contain any wild card
4692 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4693 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4694 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4695 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4696 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4697 the archive search path.
4698
4699 @node Input Section Wildcards
4700 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4701 @cindex input section wildcards
4702 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4703 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4704 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4705 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4706 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4707
4708 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4709 pattern for the file name.
4710
4711 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4712
4713 @table @samp
4714 @item *
4715 matches any number of characters
4716 @item ?
4717 matches any single character
4718 @item [@var{chars}]
4719 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4720 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4721 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4722 @item \
4723 quotes the following character
4724 @end table
4725
4726 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4727 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4728 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4729 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4730 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4731 a @samp{/} character.
4732
4733 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4734 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4735 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4736
4737 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4738 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4739 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4740 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4741 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4742 @smallexample
4743 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4744 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4745 @end smallexample
4746
4747 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4748 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4749 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4750 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4751 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4752 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4753 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4754
4755 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4756 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4757 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into descending order of
4758 alignment before placing them in the output file. Placing larger
4759 alignments before smaller alignments can reduce the amount of padding
4760 needed.
4761
4762 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4763 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is also similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4764 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into ascending
4765 numerical order of the GCC init_priority attribute encoded in the
4766 section name before placing them in the output file. In
4767 @code{.init_array.NNNNN} and @code{.fini_array.NNNNN}, @code{NNNNN} is
4768 the init_priority. In @code{.ctors.NNNNN} and @code{.dtors.NNNNN},
4769 @code{NNNNN} is 65535 minus the init_priority.
4770
4771 @cindex SORT
4772 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4773
4774 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4775 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4776
4777 @enumerate
4778 @item
4779 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4780 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4781 sections have the same name.
4782 @item
4783 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4784 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4785 sections have the same alignment.
4786 @item
4787 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4788 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4789 @item
4790 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4791 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4792 @item
4793 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4794 @end enumerate
4795
4796 When both command-line section sorting option and linker script
4797 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4798 takes precedence over the command-line option.
4799
4800 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4801 command-line option will make the section sorting command to be
4802 treated as nested sorting command.
4803
4804 @enumerate
4805 @item
4806 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4807 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4808 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4809 @item
4810 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4811 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4812 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4813 @end enumerate
4814
4815 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4816 command-line option will be ignored.
4817
4818 @cindex SORT_NONE
4819 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command-line
4820 section sorting option.
4821
4822 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4823 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4824 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4825
4826 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4827 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4828 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4829 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4830 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4831 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4832 @smallexample
4833 @group
4834 SECTIONS @{
4835 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4836 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4837 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4838 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4839 @}
4840 @end group
4841 @end smallexample
4842
4843 @node Input Section Common
4844 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4845 @cindex common symbol placement
4846 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4847 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4848 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4849 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4850 named @samp{COMMON}.
4851
4852 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4853 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4854 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4855 input files are placed in another section.
4856
4857 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4858 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4859 @smallexample
4860 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4861 @end smallexample
4862
4863 @cindex scommon section
4864 @cindex small common symbols
4865 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4866 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4867 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4868 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4869 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4870 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4871 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4872 locations.
4873
4874 @cindex [COMMON]
4875 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4876 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4877 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4878
4879 @node Input Section Keep
4880 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4881 @cindex KEEP
4882 @cindex garbage collection
4883 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4884 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4885 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4886 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4887 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4888
4889 @node Input Section Example
4890 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4891 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4892 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4893 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4894 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4895 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4896 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4897 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4898 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4899 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4900
4901 @smallexample
4902 @group
4903 SECTIONS @{
4904 outputa 0x10000 :
4905 @{
4906 all.o
4907 foo.o (.input1)
4908 @}
4909 @end group
4910 @group
4911 outputb :
4912 @{
4913 foo.o (.input2)
4914 foo1.o (.input1)
4915 @}
4916 @end group
4917 @group
4918 outputc :
4919 @{
4920 *(.input1)
4921 *(.input2)
4922 @}
4923 @}
4924 @end group
4925 @end smallexample
4926
4927 If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4928 and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4929 automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4930 __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4931 indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4932 respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4933 C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4934
4935 @node Output Section Data
4936 @subsection Output Section Data
4937 @cindex data
4938 @cindex section data
4939 @cindex output section data
4940 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4941 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4942 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4943 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4944 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4945 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4946 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4947 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4948 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4949 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4950 counter.
4951
4952 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4953 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4954 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4955 stored.
4956
4957 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4958 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4959 @smallexample
4960 BYTE(1)
4961 LONG(addr)
4962 @end smallexample
4963
4964 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4965 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4966 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4967 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4968 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4969
4970 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4971 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4972 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4973 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4974 endianness of the first input object file.
4975
4976 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4977 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4978 @smallexample
4979 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4980 @end smallexample
4981 whereas this will work:
4982 @smallexample
4983 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4984 @end smallexample
4985
4986 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4987 @cindex holes, filling
4988 @cindex unspecified memory
4989 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4990 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4991 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4992 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4993 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4994 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4995 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4996 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4997 different parts of an output section.
4998
4999 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
5000 value @samp{0x90}:
5001 @smallexample
5002 FILL(0x90909090)
5003 @end smallexample
5004
5005 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
5006 section attribute, but it only affects the
5007 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
5008 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
5009 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
5010 expression.
5011
5012 @node Output Section Keywords
5013 @subsection Output Section Keywords
5014 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
5015 commands.
5016
5017 @table @code
5018 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
5019 @cindex input filename symbols
5020 @cindex filename symbols
5021 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
5022 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
5023 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
5024 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
5025 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
5026
5027 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
5028 normally used for any other object file format.
5029
5030 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
5031 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
5032 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
5033 @item CONSTRUCTORS
5034 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
5035 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
5036 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
5037 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
5038 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
5039 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
5040 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
5041 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
5042 ignored for other object file formats.
5043
5044 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
5045 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
5046 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
5047 the start and end of the global destructors. The
5048 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
5049 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
5050 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
5051 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
5052 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
5053 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
5054 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
5055 @code{exit}.
5056
5057 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
5058 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
5059 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
5060 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
5061 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
5062 runtime code expects to see.
5063
5064 @smallexample
5065 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
5066 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
5067 *(.ctors)
5068 LONG(0)
5069 __CTOR_END__ = .;
5070 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
5071 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
5072 *(.dtors)
5073 LONG(0)
5074 __DTOR_END__ = .;
5075 @end smallexample
5076
5077 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
5078 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
5079 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
5080 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
5081 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
5082 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
5083 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
5084 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
5085
5086 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
5087 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
5088 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
5089 scripts.
5090
5091 @end table
5092
5093 @node Output Section Discarding
5094 @subsection Output Section Discarding
5095 @cindex discarding sections
5096 @cindex sections, discarding
5097 @cindex removing sections
5098 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
5099 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
5100 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
5101 @smallexample
5102 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
5103 @end smallexample
5104 @noindent
5105 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
5106 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
5107 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
5108 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
5109 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
5110 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
5111 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
5112 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
5113 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
5114
5115 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
5116 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
5117 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
5118 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
5119 section is discarded.
5120
5121 @cindex /DISCARD/
5122 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
5123 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
5124 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
5125
5126 Note, sections that match the @samp{/DISCARD/} output section will be
5127 discarded even if they are in an ELF section group which has other
5128 members which are not being discarded. This is deliberate.
5129 Discarding takes precedence over grouping.
5130
5131 @node Output Section Attributes
5132 @subsection Output Section Attributes
5133 @cindex output section attributes
5134 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
5135 like this:
5136
5137 @smallexample
5138 @group
5139 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
5140 [AT(@var{lma})]
5141 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
5142 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
5143 [@var{constraint}]
5144 @{
5145 @var{output-section-command}
5146 @var{output-section-command}
5147 @dots{}
5148 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
5149 @end group
5150 @end smallexample
5151
5152 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
5153 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
5154 remaining section attributes.
5155
5156 @menu
5157 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
5158 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
5159 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
5160 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
5161 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
5162 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
5163 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
5164 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
5165 @end menu
5166
5167 @node Output Section Type
5168 @subsubsection Output Section Type
5169 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
5170 parentheses. The following types are defined:
5171
5172 @table @code
5173 @item NOLOAD
5174 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
5175 loaded into memory when the program is run.
5176 @item DSECT
5177 @itemx COPY
5178 @itemx INFO
5179 @itemx OVERLAY
5180 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
5181 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
5182 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
5183 section when the program is run.
5184 @end table
5185
5186 @kindex NOLOAD
5187 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
5188 @cindex loading, preventing
5189 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
5190 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
5191 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
5192 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
5193 need to be loaded when the program is run.
5194 @smallexample
5195 @group
5196 SECTIONS @{
5197 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
5198 @dots{}
5199 @}
5200 @end group
5201 @end smallexample
5202
5203 @node Output Section LMA
5204 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
5205 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
5206 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
5207 @cindex load address
5208 @cindex section load address
5209 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
5210 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
5211 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
5212 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
5213 address is optional.
5214
5215 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
5216 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
5217 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
5218 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
5219 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
5220
5221 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
5222 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
5223 load address:
5224
5225 @itemize @bullet
5226 @item
5227 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
5228 the LMA address as well.
5229
5230 @item
5231 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
5232
5233 @item
5234 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
5235 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
5236 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
5237 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
5238 the last section in the located region.
5239
5240 @item
5241 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
5242 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5243
5244 @item
5245 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5246 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5247 @end itemize
5248
5249 @cindex ROM initialized data
5250 @cindex initialized data in ROM
5251 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5252 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5253 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5254 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5255 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5256 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5257 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5258 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5259
5260 @smallexample
5261 @group
5262 SECTIONS
5263 @{
5264 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
5265 .mdata 0x2000 :
5266 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5267 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5268 .bss 0x3000 :
5269 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5270 @}
5271 @end group
5272 @end smallexample
5273
5274 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5275 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5276 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5277 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5278 script.
5279
5280 @smallexample
5281 @group
5282 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5283 char *src = &_etext;
5284 char *dst = &_data;
5285
5286 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5287 while (dst < &_edata)
5288 *dst++ = *src++;
5289
5290 /* Zero bss. */
5291 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5292 *dst = 0;
5293 @end group
5294 @end smallexample
5295
5296 @node Forced Output Alignment
5297 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5298 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5299 @cindex forcing output section alignment
5300 @cindex output section alignment
5301 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
5302 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5303 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
5304
5305 @node Forced Input Alignment
5306 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5307 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5308 @cindex forcing input section alignment
5309 @cindex input section alignment
5310 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5311 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5312 sections, whether larger or smaller.
5313
5314 @node Output Section Constraint
5315 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5316 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5317 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5318 @cindex constraints on output sections
5319 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5320 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5321 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5322 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5323
5324 @node Output Section Region
5325 @subsubsection Output Section Region
5326 @kindex >@var{region}
5327 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
5328 @cindex memory regions and sections
5329 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5330 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5331
5332 Here is a simple example:
5333 @smallexample
5334 @group
5335 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5336 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5337 @end group
5338 @end smallexample
5339
5340 @node Output Section Phdr
5341 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
5342 @kindex :@var{phdr}
5343 @cindex section, assigning to program header
5344 @cindex program headers and sections
5345 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5346 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5347 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5348 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5349 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5350 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5351
5352 Here is a simple example:
5353 @smallexample
5354 @group
5355 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5356 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5357 @end group
5358 @end smallexample
5359
5360 @node Output Section Fill
5361 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
5362 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
5363 @cindex section fill pattern
5364 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
5365 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5366 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5367 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5368 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
5369 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5370 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
5371 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
5372 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5373 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
5374 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
5375 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5376 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
5377
5378 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
5379 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
5380
5381 Here is a simple example:
5382 @smallexample
5383 @group
5384 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
5385 @end group
5386 @end smallexample
5387
5388 @node Overlay Description
5389 @subsection Overlay Description
5390 @kindex OVERLAY
5391 @cindex overlays
5392 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5393 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5394 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5395 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5396 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5397 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5398 than another.
5399
5400 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5401 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5402 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5403 command is as follows:
5404 @smallexample
5405 @group
5406 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5407 @{
5408 @var{secname1}
5409 @{
5410 @var{output-section-command}
5411 @var{output-section-command}
5412 @dots{}
5413 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5414 @var{secname2}
5415 @{
5416 @var{output-section-command}
5417 @var{output-section-command}
5418 @dots{}
5419 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5420 @dots{}
5421 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
5422 @end group
5423 @end smallexample
5424
5425 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5426 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5427 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
5428 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
5429 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5430 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5431
5432 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5433 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5434
5435 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5436 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5437 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5438 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5439 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5440 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5441
5442 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5443 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5444 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5445 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5446 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
5447
5448 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
5449 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
5450 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5451 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5452 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5453 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5454 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5455
5456 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5457 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5458
5459 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5460 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
5461 @smallexample
5462 @group
5463 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5464 @{
5465 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5466 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5467 @}
5468 @end group
5469 @end smallexample
5470 @noindent
5471 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5472 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5473 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
5474 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
5475 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5476 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
5477
5478 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5479 like the following.
5480
5481 @smallexample
5482 @group
5483 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5484 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5485 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5486 @end group
5487 @end smallexample
5488
5489 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5490 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5491 example could have been written identically as follows.
5492
5493 @smallexample
5494 @group
5495 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5496 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5497 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
5498 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5499 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5500 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
5501 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5502 @end group
5503 @end smallexample
5504
5505 @node MEMORY
5506 @section MEMORY Command
5507 @kindex MEMORY
5508 @cindex memory regions
5509 @cindex regions of memory
5510 @cindex allocating memory
5511 @cindex discontinuous memory
5512 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5513 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5514
5515 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5516 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5517 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5518 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5519 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5520 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5521 around to fit into the available regions.
5522
5523 A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5524 however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5525 specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5526 @code{MEMORY} is:
5527 @smallexample
5528 @group
5529 MEMORY
5530 @{
5531 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5532 @dots{}
5533 @}
5534 @end group
5535 @end smallexample
5536
5537 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5538 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5539 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5540 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
5541 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5542 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
5543 command.
5544
5545 @cindex memory region attributes
5546 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5547 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5548 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5549 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5550 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5551 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5552 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5553
5554 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5555 @table @samp
5556 @item R
5557 Read-only section
5558 @item W
5559 Read/write section
5560 @item X
5561 Executable section
5562 @item A
5563 Allocatable section
5564 @item I
5565 Initialized section
5566 @item L
5567 Same as @samp{I}
5568 @item !
5569 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5570 @end table
5571
5572 If an unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5573 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5574 attribute reverses the test for the characters that follow, so that an
5575 unmapped section will be placed in the memory region only if it does
5576 not match any of the attributes listed afterwards. Thus an attribute
5577 string of @samp{RW!X} will match any unmapped section that has either
5578 or both of the @samp{R} and @samp{W} attributes, but only as long as
5579 the section does not also have the @samp{X} attribute.
5580
5581 @kindex ORIGIN =
5582 @kindex o =
5583 @kindex org =
5584 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5585 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5586 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5587 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5588 @code{ORG}).
5589
5590 @kindex LENGTH =
5591 @kindex len =
5592 @kindex l =
5593 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5594 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5595 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5596 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5597
5598 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5599 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5600 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5601 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5602 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5603 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5604 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5605 region.
5606
5607 @smallexample
5608 @group
5609 MEMORY
5610 @{
5611 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5612 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5613 @}
5614 @end group
5615 @end smallexample
5616
5617 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5618 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5619 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5620 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5621 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5622 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5623 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5624 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5625 region, the linker will issue an error message.
5626
5627 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5628 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5629 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5630
5631 @smallexample
5632 @group
5633 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5634 @end group
5635 @end smallexample
5636
5637 @node PHDRS
5638 @section PHDRS Command
5639 @kindex PHDRS
5640 @cindex program headers
5641 @cindex ELF program headers
5642 @cindex program segments
5643 @cindex segments, ELF
5644 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5645 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5646 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5647 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5648
5649 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5650 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5651 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5652 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5653 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5654
5655 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5656 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5657 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5658 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5659 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5660
5661 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5662 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5663 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5664
5665 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5666 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5667
5668 @smallexample
5669 @group
5670 PHDRS
5671 @{
5672 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5673 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5674 @}
5675 @end group
5676 @end smallexample
5677
5678 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5679 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5680 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5681 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5682 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5683 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5684
5685 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5686 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5687 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5688 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5689 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5690 Section Phdr}.
5691
5692 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5693 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5694 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5695 contain the section.
5696
5697 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5698 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5699 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5700 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5701 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5702 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5703 segment at all.
5704
5705 @kindex FILEHDR
5706 @kindex PHDRS
5707 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5708 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5709 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5710 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5711 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5712 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5713 these keywords.
5714
5715 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5716 value of the keyword.
5717
5718 @table @asis
5719 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5720 Indicates an unused program header.
5721
5722 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5723 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5724 the file.
5725
5726 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5727 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5728
5729 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5730 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5731 found.
5732
5733 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5734 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5735
5736 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5737 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5738 ABI.
5739
5740 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5741 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5742
5743 @item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5744 Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5745
5746 @item @var{expression}
5747 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5748 be used for types not defined above.
5749 @end table
5750
5751 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5752 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5753 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5754 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5755 output section attribute.
5756
5757 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5758 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5759 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5760 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5761 header.
5762
5763 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5764 headers used on a native ELF system.
5765
5766 @example
5767 @group
5768 PHDRS
5769 @{
5770 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5771 interp PT_INTERP ;
5772 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5773 data PT_LOAD ;
5774 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5775 @}
5776
5777 SECTIONS
5778 @{
5779 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5780 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5781 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5782 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5783 @dots{}
5784 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5785 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5786 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5787 @dots{}
5788 @}
5789 @end group
5790 @end example
5791
5792 @node VERSION
5793 @section VERSION Command
5794 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5795 @cindex symbol versions
5796 @cindex version script
5797 @cindex versions of symbols
5798 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5799 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5800 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5801 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5802 shared library.
5803
5804 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5805 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5806 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5807
5808 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5809 @smallexample
5810 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5811 @end smallexample
5812
5813 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5814 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5815 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5816 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5817 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5818 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5819 library.
5820
5821 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5822 examples.
5823
5824 @smallexample
5825 VERS_1.1 @{
5826 global:
5827 foo1;
5828 local:
5829 old*;
5830 original*;
5831 new*;
5832 @};
5833
5834 VERS_1.2 @{
5835 foo2;
5836 @} VERS_1.1;
5837
5838 VERS_2.0 @{
5839 bar1; bar2;
5840 extern "C++" @{
5841 ns::*;
5842 "f(int, double)";
5843 @};
5844 @} VERS_1.2;
5845 @end smallexample
5846
5847 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5848 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5849 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5850 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5851 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5852 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5853 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5854 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5855 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5856 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5857
5858 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5859 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5860 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5861
5862 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5863 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5864 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5865
5866 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5867 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5868 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5869 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5870 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5871 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5872 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5873 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5874 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5875
5876 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5877 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5878 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5879 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5880
5881 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5882 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5883 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5884 won't.
5885
5886 @smallexample
5887 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5888 @end smallexample
5889
5890 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5891 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5892 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5893 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5894 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5895 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5896 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5897 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5898 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5899 search for each symbol reference.
5900
5901 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5902 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5903 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5904 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5905 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5906 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5907 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5908 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5909 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5910
5911 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5912 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5913 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5914 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5915 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5916 @smallexample
5917 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5918 @end smallexample
5919 @noindent
5920 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5921 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5922 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5923 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5924 takes precedence over a version script.
5925
5926 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5927 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5928 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5929 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5930 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5931
5932 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5933 source file. Here is an example:
5934
5935 @smallexample
5936 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5937 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5938 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5939 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5940 @end smallexample
5941
5942 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5943 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5944 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5945 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5946
5947 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5948 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5949 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5950 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5951 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5952 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5953
5954 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5955 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5956 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5957 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5958
5959 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5960
5961 @smallexample
5962 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5963 @end smallexample
5964
5965 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5966 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5967 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5968 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5969 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5970
5971 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5972 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5973 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5974 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5975 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5976 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5977 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5978 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5979 expect when you upgrade.
5980
5981 @node Expressions
5982 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5983 @cindex expressions
5984 @cindex arithmetic
5985 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5986 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5987 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5988 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5989
5990 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5991
5992 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5993 expressions.
5994
5995 @menu
5996 * Constants:: Constants
5997 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5998 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5999 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
6000 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
6001 * Operators:: Operators
6002 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
6003 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
6004 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
6005 @end menu
6006
6007 @node Constants
6008 @subsection Constants
6009 @cindex integer notation
6010 @cindex constants in linker scripts
6011 All constants are integers.
6012
6013 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
6014 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
6015 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
6016 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
6017 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
6018 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
6019
6020 @cindex scaled integers
6021 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
6022 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
6023 @cindex suffixes for integers
6024 @cindex integer suffixes
6025 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
6026 constant by
6027 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6028 @ifnottex
6029 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6030 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
6031 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6032 @end ifnottex
6033 @tex
6034 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
6035 @end tex
6036 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6037 respectively. For example, the following
6038 all refer to the same quantity:
6039
6040 @smallexample
6041 _fourk_1 = 4K;
6042 _fourk_2 = 4096;
6043 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
6044 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
6045 @end smallexample
6046
6047 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
6048 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
6049
6050 @node Symbolic Constants
6051 @subsection Symbolic Constants
6052 @cindex symbolic constants
6053 @kindex CONSTANT
6054 It is possible to refer to target-specific constants via the use of
6055 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
6056
6057 @table @code
6058 @item MAXPAGESIZE
6059 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
6060 The target's maximum page size.
6061
6062 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
6063 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
6064 The target's default page size.
6065 @end table
6066
6067 So for example:
6068
6069 @smallexample
6070 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
6071 @end smallexample
6072
6073 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
6074 supported by the target.
6075
6076 @node Symbols
6077 @subsection Symbol Names
6078 @cindex symbol names
6079 @cindex names
6080 @cindex quoted symbol names
6081 @kindex "
6082 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
6083 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
6084 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
6085 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
6086 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
6087 @smallexample
6088 "SECTION" = 9;
6089 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
6090 @end smallexample
6091
6092 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
6093 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
6094 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
6095
6096 @node Orphan Sections
6097 @subsection Orphan Sections
6098 @cindex orphan
6099 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
6100 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
6101 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
6102 output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
6103 in which to place the orphaned input section.
6104
6105 If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
6106 an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
6107 placed at the end of that output section.
6108
6109 If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
6110 sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
6111 name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
6112 orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
6113 one new output section.
6114
6115 If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
6116 then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
6117 in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
6118 linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
6119 attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
6120 sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
6121 support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
6122
6123 The command-line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
6124 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}) can be used to control which
6125 output sections an orphan is placed in.
6126
6127 @node Location Counter
6128 @subsection The Location Counter
6129 @kindex .
6130 @cindex dot
6131 @cindex location counter
6132 @cindex current output location
6133 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
6134 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
6135 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
6136 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
6137 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
6138
6139 @cindex holes
6140 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
6141 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
6142 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
6143 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
6144 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
6145
6146 @smallexample
6147 SECTIONS
6148 @{
6149 output :
6150 @{
6151 file1(.text)
6152 . = . + 1000;
6153 file2(.text)
6154 . += 1000;
6155 file3(.text)
6156 @} = 0x12345678;
6157 @}
6158 @end smallexample
6159 @noindent
6160 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
6161 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
6162 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
6163 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
6164 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
6165 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
6166
6167 @cindex dot inside sections
6168 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
6169 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
6170 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
6171 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
6172 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
6173 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
6174
6175 @smallexample
6176 SECTIONS
6177 @{
6178 . = 0x100
6179 .text: @{
6180 *(.text)
6181 . = 0x200
6182 @}
6183 . = 0x500
6184 .data: @{
6185 *(.data)
6186 . += 0x600
6187 @}
6188 @}
6189 @end smallexample
6190
6191 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
6192 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
6193 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
6194 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
6195 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
6196 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
6197 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
6198 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
6199
6200 @cindex dot outside sections
6201 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
6202 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
6203 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
6204
6205 @smallexample
6206 SECTIONS
6207 @{
6208 start_of_text = . ;
6209 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6210 end_of_text = . ;
6211
6212 start_of_data = . ;
6213 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6214 end_of_data = . ;
6215 @}
6216 @end smallexample
6217
6218 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
6219 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
6220 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
6221 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
6222 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
6223 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
6224 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
6225 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
6226 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
6227 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
6228 as follows:
6229
6230 @smallexample
6231 SECTIONS
6232 @{
6233 start_of_text = . ;
6234 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6235 end_of_text = . ;
6236
6237 start_of_data = . ;
6238 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
6239 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6240 end_of_data = . ;
6241 @}
6242 @end smallexample
6243
6244 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
6245 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6246 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6247 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6248 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6249 section. So you could write:
6250
6251 @smallexample
6252 SECTIONS
6253 @{
6254 start_of_text = . ;
6255 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6256 end_of_text = . ;
6257
6258 . = . ;
6259 start_of_data = . ;
6260 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6261 end_of_data = . ;
6262 @}
6263 @end smallexample
6264
6265 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6266 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6267
6268 @need 2000
6269 @node Operators
6270 @subsection Operators
6271 @cindex operators for arithmetic
6272 @cindex arithmetic operators
6273 @cindex precedence in expressions
6274 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6275 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6276 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6277 @ifnottex
6278 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6279 @smallexample
6280 precedence associativity Operators Notes
6281 (highest)
6282 1 left ! - ~ (1)
6283 2 left * / %
6284 3 left + -
6285 4 left >> <<
6286 5 left == != > < <= >=
6287 6 left &
6288 7 left |
6289 8 left &&
6290 9 left ||
6291 10 right ? :
6292 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6293 (lowest)
6294 @end smallexample
6295 Notes:
6296 (1) Prefix operators
6297 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
6298 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6299 @end ifnottex
6300 @tex
6301 \vskip \baselineskip
6302 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6303 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6304 \hrule
6305 \halign
6306 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6307 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6308 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6309 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6310 \noalign{\hrule}
6311 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6312 &highest&&&&&\cr
6313 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
6314 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
6315 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6316 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6317 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6318 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6319 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
6320 &7&&left&&|&\cr
6321 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6322 &9&&left&&||&\cr
6323 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
6324 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6325 &lowest&&&&&\cr
6326 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6327 \hrule}
6328 @end tex
6329 @iftex
6330 {
6331 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6332 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
6333 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6334 }
6335 @end iftex
6336 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6337
6338 @node Evaluation
6339 @subsection Evaluation
6340 @cindex lazy evaluation
6341 @cindex expression evaluation order
6342 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6343 an expression when absolutely necessary.
6344
6345 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6346 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6347 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6348 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6349
6350 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6351 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6352 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6353 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6354
6355 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6356 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6357 allocation.
6358
6359 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6360 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6361
6362 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6363 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6364 following
6365 @smallexample
6366 @group
6367 SECTIONS
6368 @{
6369 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
6370 @{ *(.text) @}
6371 @}
6372 @end group
6373 @end smallexample
6374 @noindent
6375 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6376 address}.
6377
6378 @node Expression Section
6379 @subsection The Section of an Expression
6380 @cindex expression sections
6381 @cindex absolute expressions
6382 @cindex relative expressions
6383 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6384 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6385 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
6386 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6387 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6388 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6389 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6390 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6391 operations.
6392
6393 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6394 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6395 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6396 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6397 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
6398 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6399 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
6400 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6401 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6402 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6403 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
6404 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6405 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6406 everywhere.
6407
6408 In the following simple example,
6409
6410 @smallexample
6411 @group
6412 SECTIONS
6413 @{
6414 . = 0x100;
6415 __executable_start = 0x100;
6416 .data :
6417 @{
6418 . = 0x10;
6419 __data_start = 0x10;
6420 *(.data)
6421 @}
6422 @dots{}
6423 @}
6424 @end group
6425 @end smallexample
6426
6427 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6428 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6429 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6430 section in the second two assignments.
6431
6432 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6433 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
6434
6435 @itemize @bullet
6436 @item
6437 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6438 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6439 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6440 @item
6441 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6442 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6443 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6444 @item
6445 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6446 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6447 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6448 before applying the operator.
6449 @end itemize
6450
6451 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6452
6453 @itemize @bullet
6454 @item
6455 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6456 @item
6457 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6458 @item
6459 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
6460 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
6461 (after above conversions) is also a number when
6462 @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6463 but an absolute address otherwise.
6464 @item
6465 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6466 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6467 section as the relative operand(s).
6468 @item
6469 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6470 conversions) is an absolute address.
6471 @end itemize
6472
6473 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6474 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6475 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6476 section @samp{.data}:
6477 @smallexample
6478 SECTIONS
6479 @{
6480 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6481 @}
6482 @end smallexample
6483 @noindent
6484 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6485 @samp{.data} section.
6486
6487 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6488 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6489
6490 @node Builtin Functions
6491 @subsection Builtin Functions
6492 @cindex functions in expressions
6493 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6494 use in linker script expressions.
6495
6496 @table @code
6497 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6498 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6499 @cindex expression, absolute
6500 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6501 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6502 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6503 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6504
6505 @item ADDR(@var{section})
6506 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6507 @cindex section address in expression
6508 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
6509 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
6510 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6511 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6512 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6513 the other two will be absolute:
6514 @smallexample
6515 @group
6516 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6517 .output1 :
6518 @{
6519 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6520 @dots{}
6521 @}
6522 .output :
6523 @{
6524 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6525 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6526 @}
6527 @dots{} @}
6528 @end group
6529 @end smallexample
6530
6531 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
6532 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6533 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6534 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6535 @cindex round up location counter
6536 @cindex align location counter
6537 @cindex round up expression
6538 @cindex align expression
6539 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6540 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6541 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6542 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6543 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
6544 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
6545
6546 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6547 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6548 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6549 input sections:
6550 @smallexample
6551 @group
6552 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6553 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6554 *(.data)
6555 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6556 @}
6557 @dots{} @}
6558 @end group
6559 @end smallexample
6560 @noindent
6561 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6562 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6563 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6564 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6565
6566 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6567
6568 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6569 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6570 @cindex section alignment
6571 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6572 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6573 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6574 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6575 value in that section.
6576 @smallexample
6577 @group
6578 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6579 .output @{
6580 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6581 @dots{}
6582 @}
6583 @dots{} @}
6584 @end group
6585 @end smallexample
6586
6587 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6588 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6589 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6590 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6591 section.
6592
6593 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6594 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6595 This is equivalent to either
6596 @smallexample
6597 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6598 @end smallexample
6599 or
6600 @smallexample
6601 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6602 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6603 @end smallexample
6604 @noindent
6605 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6606 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6607 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6608 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6609 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6610 bytes in the on-disk file.
6611
6612 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6613 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6614 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6615 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6616 running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6617 that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6618 page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
6619
6620 @noindent
6621 Example:
6622 @smallexample
6623 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6624 @end smallexample
6625
6626 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6627 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6628 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6629 evaluation purposes.
6630
6631 @smallexample
6632 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6633 @end smallexample
6634
6635 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6636 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6637 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6638 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
6639 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6640 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6641 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6642 argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6643 script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6644 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6645 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6646 section alignment.
6647
6648 @smallexample
6649 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6650 @end smallexample
6651
6652 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6653 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6654 @cindex symbol defaults
6655 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6656 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6657 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6658 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6659 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6660 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6661 existed, its value is preserved:
6662
6663 @smallexample
6664 @group
6665 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6666 .text : @{
6667 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6668 @dots{}
6669 @}
6670 @dots{}
6671 @}
6672 @end group
6673 @end smallexample
6674
6675 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6676 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6677 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6678
6679 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6680 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6681 @cindex section load address in expression
6682 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6683 Section LMA}).
6684
6685 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6686 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6687 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6688 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6689
6690 @kindex MAX
6691 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6692 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6693
6694 @kindex MIN
6695 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6696 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6697
6698 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6699 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6700 @cindex unallocated address, next
6701 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6702 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6703 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6704 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6705
6706 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6707 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6708 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6709
6710 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6711 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6712 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6713 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6714 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6715 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6716 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6717 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6718 name.
6719
6720 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6721 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6722 @cindex section size
6723 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6724 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6725 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6726 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6727 @smallexample
6728 @group
6729 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6730 .output @{
6731 .start = . ;
6732 @dots{}
6733 .end = . ;
6734 @}
6735 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6736 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6737 @dots{} @}
6738 @end group
6739 @end smallexample
6740
6741 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6742 @itemx sizeof_headers
6743 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6744 @cindex header size
6745 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6746 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6747 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6748 choose, to facilitate paging.
6749
6750 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6751 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6752 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6753 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6754 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6755 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6756 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6757 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6758 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6759 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6760 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6761 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6762 @end table
6763
6764 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6765 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6766 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6767 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6768 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6769 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6770 linker will report an error.
6771
6772 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6773
6774 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6775 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6776 commands.
6777
6778 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6779 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6780 read. This can affect archive searching.
6781
6782 @ifset GENERIC
6783 @node Machine Dependent
6784 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6785
6786 @cindex machine dependencies
6787 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6788 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6789 functionality are not listed.
6790
6791 @menu
6792 @ifset H8300
6793 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6794 @end ifset
6795 @ifset M68HC11
6796 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6797 @end ifset
6798 @ifset ARM
6799 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6800 @end ifset
6801 @ifset HPPA
6802 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6803 @end ifset
6804 @ifset M68K
6805 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6806 @end ifset
6807 @ifset MIPS
6808 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6809 @end ifset
6810 @ifset MMIX
6811 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6812 @end ifset
6813 @ifset MSP430
6814 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6815 @end ifset
6816 @ifset NDS32
6817 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6818 @end ifset
6819 @ifset NIOSII
6820 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6821 @end ifset
6822 @ifset POWERPC
6823 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6824 @end ifset
6825 @ifset POWERPC64
6826 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6827 @end ifset
6828 @ifset S/390
6829 * S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6830 @end ifset
6831 @ifset SPU
6832 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6833 @end ifset
6834 @ifset TICOFF
6835 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6836 @end ifset
6837 @ifset WIN32
6838 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6839 @end ifset
6840 @ifset XTENSA
6841 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6842 @end ifset
6843 @end menu
6844 @end ifset
6845
6846 @ifset H8300
6847 @ifclear GENERIC
6848 @raisesections
6849 @end ifclear
6850
6851 @node H8/300
6852 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6853
6854 @cindex H8/300 support
6855 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6856 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6857
6858 @table @emph
6859 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6860 @item relaxing address modes
6861 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6862 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6863 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6864 respectively.
6865
6866 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6867 @item synthesizing instructions
6868 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6869 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6870 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6871 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6872 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6873 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6874 top page of memory).
6875
6876 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6877 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6878 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6879 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6880 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6881 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6882 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6883
6884 @item bit manipulation instructions
6885 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6886 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6887 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6888 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6889 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6890 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6891 the top page of memory).
6892
6893 @item system control instructions
6894 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6895 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6896 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6897 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6898 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6899 the top page of memory).
6900 @end table
6901
6902 @ifclear GENERIC
6903 @lowersections
6904 @end ifclear
6905 @end ifset
6906
6907 @ifclear GENERIC
6908 @ifset Renesas
6909 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6910 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6911 @node Renesas
6912 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6913
6914 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6915 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6916 options are required for these chips.
6917 @end ifset
6918 @end ifclear
6919
6920 @ifset ARM
6921 @ifclear GENERIC
6922 @raisesections
6923 @end ifclear
6924
6925 @ifset M68HC11
6926 @ifclear GENERIC
6927 @raisesections
6928 @end ifclear
6929
6930 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6931 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6932
6933 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6934
6935 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6936
6937 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6938 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6939
6940 @table @emph
6941 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6942 @item relaxing address modes
6943 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6944 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6945 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6946 respectively.
6947
6948 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6949 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6950 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6951
6952 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6953 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6954 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6955 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6956 @code{bset} instructions.
6957
6958 @end table
6959
6960 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6961
6962 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6963 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6964 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6965 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6966 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6967 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6968 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6969 point to the function trampoline.
6970
6971 @ifclear GENERIC
6972 @lowersections
6973 @end ifclear
6974 @end ifset
6975
6976 @node ARM
6977 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6978
6979 @cindex ARM interworking support
6980 @kindex --support-old-code
6981 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6982 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6983 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6984 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6985 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6986 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command-line switch should be
6987 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6988 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6989 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6990 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6991
6992 @cindex thumb entry point
6993 @cindex entry point, thumb
6994 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6995 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6996 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6997 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6998 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6999 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
7000
7001 @cindex PE import table prefixing
7002 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
7003 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
7004 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
7005 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
7006 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
7007
7008 @cindex BE8
7009 @kindex --be8
7010 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
7011 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
7012 objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
7013 option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
7014 little-endian code.
7015
7016 @cindex TARGET1
7017 @kindex --target1-rel
7018 @kindex --target1-abs
7019 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
7020 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
7021 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
7022 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
7023
7024 @cindex TARGET2
7025 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
7026 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
7027 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
7028 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
7029 @table @samp
7030 @item rel
7031 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
7032 @item abs
7033 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
7034 @item got-rel
7035 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
7036 @end table
7037
7038 @cindex FIX_V4BX
7039 @kindex --fix-v4bx
7040 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
7041 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
7042 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
7043 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
7044
7045 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
7046 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
7047 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
7048
7049 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
7050 relocations are ignored.
7051
7052 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
7053 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
7054 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
7055 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
7056
7057 @smallexample
7058 TST rM, #1
7059 MOVEQ PC, rM
7060 BX Rn
7061 @end smallexample
7062
7063 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
7064 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
7065 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
7066
7067 @cindex USE_BLX
7068 @kindex --use-blx
7069 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
7070 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
7071 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
7072 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
7073 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
7074
7075 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
7076 specify it if you are using that target.
7077
7078 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
7079 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
7080 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
7081 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
7082 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
7083 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
7084 the support code can read the intended values.
7085
7086 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
7087 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
7088 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
7089 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
7090 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
7091 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
7092
7093 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
7094 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
7095 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
7096 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
7097 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
7098 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
7099
7100 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
7101 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
7102 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
7103 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
7104 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
7105 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
7106 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
7107
7108 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
7109 @kindex --fix-arm1176
7110 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
7111 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
7112 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
7113 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
7114 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
7115
7116 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
7117 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
7118 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
7119
7120 @cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
7121 @kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
7122
7123 The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
7124 workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
7125 the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
7126 off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
7127 the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
7128 core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
7129 integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
7130 VPOP. Stores are not affected.
7131
7132 The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
7133 necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
7134
7135 The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
7136 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
7137 STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
7138 linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
7139 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
7140
7141 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
7142 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
7143 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
7144 replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
7145 branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
7146 then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
7147
7148 The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
7149 the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
7150
7151 The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
7152 they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
7153 there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7154 occurs.
7155
7156 The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
7157 PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
7158 large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
7159 cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7160 occurs.
7161
7162 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
7163 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
7164 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7165 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7166 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7167 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
7168 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
7169 not be diagnosed.
7170
7171 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
7172 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
7173 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7174 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7175 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7176 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
7177 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
7178
7179 @cindex PIC_VENEER
7180 @kindex --pic-veneer
7181 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
7182 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
7183 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
7184 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
7185
7186 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
7187 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7188 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
7189 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
7190 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
7191 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
7192 controlled by the command-line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
7193 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
7194 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
7195 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
7196 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
7197 where they should be placed.
7198
7199 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
7200 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
7201 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
7202 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
7203 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
7204 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
7205 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7206 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7207 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7208 from the input sections.
7209
7210 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7211 @samp{N = +1}.
7212
7213 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7214 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7215 otherwise.
7216
7217 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7218 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7219 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7220 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7221
7222 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7223
7224 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7225 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7226 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7227 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7228
7229 Please contact ARM for further details.
7230
7231 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7232 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7233 @cindex Merging exidx entries
7234 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7235
7236 @kindex --long-plt
7237 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7238 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7239 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7240 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7241
7242 @kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7243 @cindex AArch64 rela addend
7244 The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7245 link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7246
7247 @cindex Placement of SG veneers
7248 All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
7249 Its start address must be set, either with the command-line option
7250 @samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7251 veneers in memory.
7252
7253 @kindex --cmse-implib
7254 @cindex Secure gateway import library
7255 The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7256 specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7257 secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7258 executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7259
7260 @kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7261 @cindex Input import library
7262 The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7263 must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7264 given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7265 in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7266 @samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7267 library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7268 library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7269 for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7270 specified.
7271
7272 @ifclear GENERIC
7273 @lowersections
7274 @end ifclear
7275 @end ifset
7276
7277 @ifset HPPA
7278 @ifclear GENERIC
7279 @raisesections
7280 @end ifclear
7281
7282 @node HPPA ELF32
7283 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7284 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7285 @kindex --multi-subspace
7286 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7287 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7288 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7289 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7290 multiple sub-spaces.
7291
7292 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
7293 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7294 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7295 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7296 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7297 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7298 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7299 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7300 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7301 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7302 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7303 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7304 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7305 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7306 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7307 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7308
7309 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7310 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7311 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7312 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7313
7314 @ifclear GENERIC
7315 @lowersections
7316 @end ifclear
7317 @end ifset
7318
7319 @ifset M68K
7320 @ifclear GENERIC
7321 @raisesections
7322 @end ifclear
7323
7324 @node M68K
7325 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7326
7327 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7328 @kindex --got=@var{type}
7329 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7330 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7331 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7332 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7333 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7334 entries only at non-negative offsets.
7335 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7336 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7337 support such GOTs.
7338 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7339 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7340 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7341 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7342
7343 @ifclear GENERIC
7344 @lowersections
7345 @end ifclear
7346 @end ifset
7347
7348 @ifset MIPS
7349 @ifclear GENERIC
7350 @raisesections
7351 @end ifclear
7352
7353 @node MIPS
7354 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7355
7356 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7357 @kindex --insn32
7358 @kindex --no-insn32
7359 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7360 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7361 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7362 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7363 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7364 including 16-bit ones where possible.
7365
7366 @cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7367 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7368 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7369 The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7370 control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7371 @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7372 relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7373 calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7374 relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7375 instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7376 or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7377 the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7378
7379 @ifclear GENERIC
7380 @lowersections
7381 @end ifclear
7382 @end ifset
7383
7384 @ifset MMIX
7385 @ifclear GENERIC
7386 @raisesections
7387 @end ifclear
7388
7389 @node MMIX
7390 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
7391 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7392 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7393 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7394 can translate between the two formats.
7395
7396 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7397 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7398 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7399 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7400 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7401 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7402 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7403 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7404
7405 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7406 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7407 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7408 of a section.
7409
7410 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7411 are left out from an mmo file.
7412
7413 @ifclear GENERIC
7414 @lowersections
7415 @end ifclear
7416 @end ifset
7417
7418 @ifset MSP430
7419 @ifclear GENERIC
7420 @raisesections
7421 @end ifclear
7422
7423 @node MSP430
7424 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
7425 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7426 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7427 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7428
7429 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
7430 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7431
7432 @table @code
7433 @item @samp{.vectors}
7434 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7435
7436 @item @samp{.bootloader}
7437 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7438 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7439
7440 @item @samp{.infomem}
7441 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7442 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7443
7444 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
7445 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7446 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7447
7448 @item @samp{.noinit}
7449 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7450
7451 The last two sections are used by gcc.
7452 @end table
7453
7454 @table @option
7455 @cindex MSP430 Options
7456 @kindex --code-region
7457 @item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7458 This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7459 argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7460 using this option.
7461
7462 @kindex --data-region
7463 @item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7464 This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7465 [either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7466 for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7467
7468 @kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7469 @item --disable-sec-transformation
7470 Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7471 and @code{--data-region} options.
7472 This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7473 wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7474 not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7475 @end table
7476
7477 @ifclear GENERIC
7478 @lowersections
7479 @end ifclear
7480 @end ifset
7481
7482 @ifset NDS32
7483 @ifclear GENERIC
7484 @raisesections
7485 @end ifclear
7486
7487 @node NDS32
7488 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
7489 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
7490 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7491 relaxes objects according to these options.
7492
7493 @table @code
7494 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7495 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7496
7497 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7498 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7499
7500 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7501 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7502
7503 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7504 Export the EX9 table after linking.
7505
7506 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7507 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7508
7509 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7510 Update the existing EX9 table.
7511
7512 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7513 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7514
7515 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7516 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7517
7518 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7519 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7520
7521 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7522 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7523 @end table
7524
7525 @ifclear GENERIC
7526 @lowersections
7527 @end ifclear
7528 @end ifset
7529
7530 @ifset NIOSII
7531 @ifclear GENERIC
7532 @raisesections
7533 @end ifclear
7534
7535 @node Nios II
7536 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7537 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
7538 @kindex --relax on Nios II
7539
7540 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7541 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7542 which may result in @command{ld} giving
7543 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7544 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7545 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7546 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7547 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7548 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7549 larger than 256MB.
7550
7551 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7552 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7553 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7554 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7555 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7556 register as a temporary.
7557
7558 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7559 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7560 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7561
7562 @ifclear GENERIC
7563 @lowersections
7564 @end ifclear
7565 @end ifset
7566
7567 @ifset POWERPC
7568 @ifclear GENERIC
7569 @raisesections
7570 @end ifclear
7571
7572 @node PowerPC ELF32
7573 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7574 @cindex PowerPC long branches
7575 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
7576 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7577 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7578 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7579 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7580 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7581 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
7582 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7583 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7584 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7585 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
7586
7587 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7588 @table @option
7589 @cindex PowerPC PLT
7590 @kindex --bss-plt
7591 @item --bss-plt
7592 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7593 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7594 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7595 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7596 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7597 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7598 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7599 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7600
7601 @kindex --secure-plt
7602 @item --secure-plt
7603 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7604 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7605 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7606 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7607 style BSS PLT.
7608
7609 @cindex PowerPC GOT
7610 @kindex --sdata-got
7611 @item --sdata-got
7612 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7613 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7614 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7615 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7616 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7617 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7618 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7619 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7620 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7621 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7622 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7623 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7624
7625 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7626 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7627 @item --emit-stub-syms
7628 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7629 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7630
7631 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7632 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7633 @item --no-tls-optimize
7634 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7635 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7636 disable the optimization.
7637 @end table
7638
7639 @ifclear GENERIC
7640 @lowersections
7641 @end ifclear
7642 @end ifset
7643
7644 @ifset POWERPC64
7645 @ifclear GENERIC
7646 @raisesections
7647 @end ifclear
7648
7649 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
7650 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7651
7652 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7653 @table @option
7654 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7655 @kindex --stub-group-size
7656 @item --stub-group-size
7657 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7658 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7659 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7660 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7661 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7662 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7663 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7664 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7665 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7666 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7667 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7668 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7669 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7670 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7671
7672 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7673 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7674 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7675 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7676
7677 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7678 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7679 @item --emit-stub-syms
7680 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7681 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7682
7683 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7684 @kindex --dotsyms
7685 @kindex --no-dotsyms
7686 @item --dotsyms
7687 @itemx --no-dotsyms
7688 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7689 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7690 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7691 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7692 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7693 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7694 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7695 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7696 feature.
7697
7698 @cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7699 @kindex --save-restore-funcs
7700 @kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
7701 @item --save-restore-funcs
7702 @itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7703 These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7704 provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7705 @samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7706 function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7707 link.
7708
7709 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7710 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7711 @item --no-tls-optimize
7712 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7713 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7714 disable the optimization.
7715
7716 @cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7717 @kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7718 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7719 @kindex --tls-get-addr-regsave
7720 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-regsave
7721 @item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7722 @itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7723 These options control how PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7724 stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7725 an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7726 @code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7727 stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables
7728 generation of the stub when glibc advertises the availability of
7729 __tls_get_addr_opt.
7730 Using @option{--tls-get-addr-optimize} with an older glibc won't do
7731 much besides slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking
7732 an application against an older glibc with the expectation that it
7733 will normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7734 @option{--tls-get-addr-regsave} forces generation of a stub that saves
7735 and restores volatile registers around the call into glibc. Normally,
7736 this is done when the linker detects a call to __tls_get_addr_desc.
7737 Such calls then go via the register saving stub to __tls_get_addr_opt.
7738 @option{--no-tls-get-addr-regsave} disables generation of the
7739 register saves.
7740
7741 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7742 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7743 @item --no-opd-optimize
7744 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7745 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7746 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7747 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7748
7749 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7750 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7751 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7752 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7753 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7754 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7755 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7756
7757 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7758 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7759 @item --no-toc-optimize
7760 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7761 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7762 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7763 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7764 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7765 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7766 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7767 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7768 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7769 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7770 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7771 optimization.
7772
7773 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7774 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7775 @item --no-multi-toc
7776 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7777 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7778 where TOC
7779 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7780 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7781 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7782 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7783 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7784 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7785 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7786 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7787
7788 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7789 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7790 @item --no-toc-sort
7791 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7792 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7793 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7794 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7795 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7796 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7797 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7798 off this feature.
7799
7800 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7801 @kindex --plt-align
7802 @kindex --no-plt-align
7803 @item --plt-align
7804 @itemx --no-plt-align
7805 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7806 aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7807 boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7808 specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7809 specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7810 if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7811 PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
7812
7813 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7814 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7815 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7816 @item --plt-static-chain
7817 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7818 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7819 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7820 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7821
7822 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7823 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7824 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7825 @item --plt-thread-safe
7826 @itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
7827 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7828 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7829 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7830 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7831 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7832 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7833 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7834 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7835 default behaviour.
7836
7837 @cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7838 @kindex --plt-localentry
7839 @kindex --no-plt-localentry
7840 @item --plt-localentry
7841 @itemx --no-localentry
7842 ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7843 ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7844 (the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7845 Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7846 or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7847 functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7848 in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
7849 interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7850 including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7851 to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7852 complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7853 care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
7854 @end table
7855
7856 @ifclear GENERIC
7857 @lowersections
7858 @end ifclear
7859 @end ifset
7860
7861 @ifset S/390
7862 @ifclear GENERIC
7863 @raisesections
7864 @end ifclear
7865
7866 @node S/390 ELF
7867 @section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7868
7869 @cindex S/390 ELF options
7870 @table @option
7871
7872 @cindex S/390
7873 @kindex --s390-pgste
7874 @item --s390-pgste
7875 This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7876 segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7877 binaries marked that way.
7878 @end table
7879
7880 @ifclear GENERIC
7881 @lowersections
7882 @end ifclear
7883 @end ifset
7884
7885 @ifset SPU
7886 @ifclear GENERIC
7887 @raisesections
7888 @end ifclear
7889
7890 @node SPU ELF
7891 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7892
7893 @cindex SPU ELF options
7894 @table @option
7895
7896 @cindex SPU plugins
7897 @kindex --plugin
7898 @item --plugin
7899 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7900
7901 @cindex SPU overlays
7902 @kindex --no-overlays
7903 @item --no-overlays
7904 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7905 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7906 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7907 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7908
7909 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7910 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7911 @item --emit-stub-syms
7912 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7913 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7914
7915 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7916 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7917 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7918 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7919 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7920 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7921
7922 @cindex SPU local store size
7923 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7924 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7925 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7926 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7927 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7928
7929 @cindex SPU
7930 @kindex --stack-analysis
7931 @item --stack-analysis
7932 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7933 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7934 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7935 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7936 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7937 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7938 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7939 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7940 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7941 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7942 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7943 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7944 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7945 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7946 and calls will be given.
7947
7948 @cindex SPU
7949 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7950 @item --emit-stack-syms
7951 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7952 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7953 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7954 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7955 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7956 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7957 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7958 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7959 @end table
7960
7961 @ifclear GENERIC
7962 @lowersections
7963 @end ifclear
7964 @end ifset
7965
7966 @ifset TICOFF
7967 @ifclear GENERIC
7968 @raisesections
7969 @end ifclear
7970
7971 @node TI COFF
7972 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7973 @cindex TI COFF versions
7974 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7975 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7976 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7977 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7978 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7979 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7980
7981 @ifclear GENERIC
7982 @lowersections
7983 @end ifclear
7984 @end ifset
7985
7986 @ifset WIN32
7987 @ifclear GENERIC
7988 @raisesections
7989 @end ifclear
7990
7991 @node WIN32
7992 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7993
7994 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7995 See @ref{Options,,Command-line Options} for detailed description of the
7996 command-line options mentioned here.
7997
7998 @table @emph
7999 @cindex import libraries
8000 @item import libraries
8001 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
8002 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
8003 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
8004 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
8005 support for creating such libraries provided with the
8006 @samp{--out-implib} command-line option.
8007
8008 @item exporting DLL symbols
8009 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
8010 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
8011
8012 @table @emph
8013 @item using auto-export functionality
8014 @cindex using auto-export functionality
8015 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
8016 which is controlled by the following command-line options:
8017
8018 @itemize
8019 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
8020 @item --exclude-symbols
8021 @item --exclude-libs
8022 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
8023 @item --version-script
8024 @end itemize
8025
8026 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
8027 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
8028 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
8029 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
8030 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
8031 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
8032 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
8033 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
8034
8035 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
8036 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
8037 if either of the following are true:
8038
8039 @itemize
8040 @item A DEF file is used.
8041 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
8042 @end itemize
8043
8044 @item using a DEF file
8045 @cindex using a DEF file
8046 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
8047 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
8048 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
8049 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
8050 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
8051
8052 @example
8053 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
8054 @end example
8055
8056 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
8057 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
8058
8059 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
8060
8061 @example
8062 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
8063
8064 EXPORTS
8065 foo
8066 bar
8067 _bar = bar
8068 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
8069 var1 DATA
8070 doo = foo == foo2
8071 eoo DATA == var1
8072 @end example
8073
8074 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
8075 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
8076 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
8077 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
8078 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
8079 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
8080 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
8081 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
8082 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
8083
8084 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
8085 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
8086 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
8087
8088 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
8089 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
8090 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
8091 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
8092
8093 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
8094 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
8095 non-default base address for the image.
8096
8097 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
8098 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
8099 filename specified on the command line.
8100
8101 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
8102
8103 @example
8104 EXPORTS
8105 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
8106 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
8107 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
8108 @end example
8109
8110 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
8111 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
8112 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
8113 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
8114 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
8115 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
8116 string in import/export table for the symbol.
8117
8118 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
8119
8120 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
8121 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
8122 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
8123 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
8124 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
8125
8126 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
8127 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
8128 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
8129 @code{*_imp__foo}).
8130
8131 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
8132 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
8133 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
8134 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
8135 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
8136 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
8137 application will behave unexpectedly.
8138
8139 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
8140 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
8141 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
8142 API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
8143 the DLL without an import library.
8144
8145 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
8146 other DEF file statements
8147
8148 @cindex creating a DEF file
8149 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
8150 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command-line option.
8151
8152 @item Using decorations
8153 @cindex Using decorations
8154 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
8155 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
8156 declared as:
8157
8158 @example
8159 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
8160 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
8161 @end example
8162
8163 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
8164 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
8165 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
8166 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
8167
8168 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
8169 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
8170 instead:
8171
8172 @example
8173 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
8174 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
8175 @end example
8176
8177 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
8178 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
8179 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
8180 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
8181 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
8182 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
8183 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
8184 information.
8185 @end table
8186
8187 @cindex automatic data imports
8188 @item automatic data imports
8189 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
8190 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
8191 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
8192 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
8193 code to these platforms, especially for large
8194 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
8195 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
8196 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
8197 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
8198 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
8199 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
8200 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
8201 trigger the feature's use.
8202
8203 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
8204 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
8205
8206 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
8207 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
8208
8209 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
8210 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
8211 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
8212 below.
8213
8214 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
8215 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
8216 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
8217 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
8218 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
8219 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
8220 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
8221 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
8222 references.
8223
8224 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
8225 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8226 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8227 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8228 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8229 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
8230 run without error on an older system.
8231
8232 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8233 enabled as needed.
8234
8235 @cindex direct linking to a dll
8236 @item direct linking to a dll
8237 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8238 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
8239 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
8240 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
8241 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8242 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8243 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
8244 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
8245 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
8246 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8247
8248 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
8249 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
8250 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
8251 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8252 select the dll instead of an import library.
8253
8254
8255 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8256 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
8257
8258 @example
8259 libxxx.dll.a
8260 xxx.dll.a
8261 libxxx.a
8262 xxx.lib
8263 libxxx.lib
8264 cygxxx.dll (*)
8265 libxxx.dll
8266 xxx.dll
8267 @end example
8268
8269 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8270
8271 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8272 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8273 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8274 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
8275 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8276
8277 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8278 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
8279 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8280 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8281 could coexist on the same machine.
8282
8283 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8284 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
8285 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
8286
8287 @example
8288 bin/
8289 cygxxx.dll
8290 lib/
8291 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
8292 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
8293 @end example
8294
8295 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8296 done two ways:
8297
8298 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8299 @example
8300 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
8301 @end example
8302
8303 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8304 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8305 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8306 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8307
8308 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8309 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8310 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8311 making the app/dll.
8312
8313 @example
8314 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
8315 @end example
8316
8317 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8318
8319 @example
8320 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
8321 @end example
8322
8323 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8324 perfectly legal
8325
8326 @example
8327 bin/
8328 cygxxx-5.dll
8329 lib/
8330 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
8331 @end example
8332
8333 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
8334 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8335 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8336
8337 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
8338 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
8339
8340 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8341 work with auto-imported data.
8342
8343 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8344 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8345 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8346 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8347 possible to do this without an import lib.
8348
8349 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8350 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8351 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8352 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8353
8354 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
8355 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8356 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8357 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
8358 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8359 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8360 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
8361
8362 @item symbol aliasing
8363 @table @emph
8364 @item adding additional names
8365 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
8366 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8367 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8368 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
8369 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
8370
8371 @example
8372 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8373
8374 EXPORTS
8375 foo
8376 _foo = foo
8377 @end example
8378
8379 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8380
8381 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8382 source code using the "weak" attribute:
8383
8384 @example
8385 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
8386 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
8387 @end example
8388
8389 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8390 symbols.
8391
8392 @item renaming symbols
8393 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
8394 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
8395 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8396 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
8397 created). In the following example:
8398
8399 @example
8400 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8401
8402 EXPORTS
8403 _foo = foo
8404 @end example
8405
8406 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8407 @samp{_foo}.
8408 @end table
8409
8410 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
8411 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command-line option is used.
8412 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
8413 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8414 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8415 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8416 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8417 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8418 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8419 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
8420 which is probably not what you wanted.
8421
8422 @cindex weak externals
8423 @item weak externals
8424 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8425 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8426 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8427 are three variants of weak externals:
8428 @itemize
8429 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8430 called lazy externals.
8431 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8432 This form is not presently implemented.
8433 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8434 implemented.
8435 @end itemize
8436 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8437 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8438 uses a default value.
8439
8440 @cindex aligned common symbols
8441 @item aligned common symbols
8442 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8443 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8444 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8445 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8446 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8447 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8448 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8449 warnings about unknown linker directives.
8450
8451 @end table
8452
8453 @ifclear GENERIC
8454 @lowersections
8455 @end ifclear
8456 @end ifset
8457
8458 @ifset XTENSA
8459 @ifclear GENERIC
8460 @raisesections
8461 @end ifclear
8462
8463 @node Xtensa
8464 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8465
8466 @cindex Xtensa processors
8467 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8468 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8469 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8470 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8471 example, with the command:
8472
8473 @smallexample
8474 SECTIONS
8475 @{
8476 .text : @{
8477 *(.literal .text)
8478 @}
8479 @}
8480 @end smallexample
8481
8482 @noindent
8483 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8484 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8485 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8486 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8487 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8488 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8489 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
8490
8491 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
8492 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
8493 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8494 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8495 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8496 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8497 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8498 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8499 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8500 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8501 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8502 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8503
8504 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8505 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8506 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8507 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8508 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8509 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8510 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8511 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8512 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8513 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8514 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8515 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8516 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8517 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8518
8519 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8520 control the linker:
8521
8522 @cindex Xtensa options
8523 @table @option
8524 @item --size-opt
8525 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8526 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8527 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8528 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8529 preserve the correctness of the code.
8530 @end table
8531
8532 @ifclear GENERIC
8533 @lowersections
8534 @end ifclear
8535 @end ifset
8536
8537 @ifclear SingleFormat
8538 @node BFD
8539 @chapter BFD
8540
8541 @cindex back end
8542 @cindex object file management
8543 @cindex object formats available
8544 @kindex objdump -i
8545 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8546 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8547 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8548 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8549 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8550 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8551 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8552 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8553 list all the formats available for your configuration.
8554
8555 @cindex BFD requirements
8556 @cindex requirements for BFD
8557 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8558 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8559 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8560 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8561 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8562 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8563 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8564
8565 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8566 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8567 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8568 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8569
8570 @menu
8571 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8572 @end menu
8573
8574 @node BFD outline
8575 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
8576 @cindex opening object files
8577 @include bfdsumm.texi
8578 @end ifclear
8579
8580 @node Reporting Bugs
8581 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8582 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8583 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
8584
8585 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
8586
8587 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8588 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
8589 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
8590 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
8591 @command{ld}.
8592
8593 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8594 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8595
8596 @menu
8597 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8598 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8599 @end menu
8600
8601 @node Bug Criteria
8602 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8603 @cindex bug criteria
8604
8605 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8606
8607 @itemize @bullet
8608 @cindex fatal signal
8609 @cindex linker crash
8610 @cindex crash of linker
8611 @item
8612 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8613 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
8614
8615 @cindex error on valid input
8616 @item
8617 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8618
8619 @cindex invalid input
8620 @item
8621 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8622 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8623 object files are correct.
8624
8625 @item
8626 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
8627 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
8628 @end itemize
8629
8630 @node Bug Reporting
8631 @section How to Report Bugs
8632 @cindex bug reports
8633 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
8634
8635 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
8636 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
8637 recommend you contact that organization first.
8638
8639 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8640 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8641 distribution.
8642
8643 @ifset BUGURL
8644 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
8645 @value{BUGURL}.
8646 @end ifset
8647
8648 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8649 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8650 fact or leave it out, state it!
8651
8652 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8653 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8654 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8655 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8656 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8657 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8658 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8659 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8660 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8661 and the most helpful.
8662
8663 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8664 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8665 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8666
8667 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8668 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8669 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8670 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8671
8672 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8673
8674 @itemize @bullet
8675 @item
8676 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
8677 the @samp{--version} argument.
8678
8679 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8680 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
8681
8682 @item
8683 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
8684 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8685
8686 @item
8687 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8688 version number.
8689
8690 @item
8691 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
8692 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8693
8694 @item
8695 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8696 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8697 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8698 sufficient.
8699
8700 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8701 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8702
8703 @item
8704 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8705 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8706 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8707 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8708 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8709 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8710 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8711 attachments are best.
8712
8713 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8714 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8715 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8716 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8717 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8718
8719 @item
8720 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8721 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8722
8723 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8724 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8725 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8726 a chance to make a mistake.
8727
8728 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8729 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8730 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8731 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8732 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8733 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8734 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8735 any conclusion from our observations.
8736
8737 @item
8738 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8739 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8740 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8741 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8742 context, not by line number.
8743
8744 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8745 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8746 @end itemize
8747
8748 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8749
8750 @itemize @bullet
8751 @item
8752 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8753
8754 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8755 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8756 changes will not affect it.
8757
8758 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8759 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8760 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8761 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8762
8763 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8764 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8765 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8766 less time, and so on.
8767
8768 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8769 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8770
8771 @item
8772 A patch for the bug.
8773
8774 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8775 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8776 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8777 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8778
8779 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8780 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8781 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8782 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8783 fixed.
8784
8785 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8786 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8787 help us to understand.
8788
8789 @item
8790 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8791
8792 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8793 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8794 @end itemize
8795
8796 @node MRI
8797 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8798 @cindex MRI compatibility
8799 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8800 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8801 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8802 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8803 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8804 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8805 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8806
8807 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8808 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8809 features to make use of them.
8810
8811 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8812 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8813
8814 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8815 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8816 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8817 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8818 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8819
8820 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8821
8822 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8823 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8824 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8825
8826 @table @code
8827 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8828 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8829 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8830 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8831 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8832 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8833 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8834 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8835 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8836 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8837 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8838
8839 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8840 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8841 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8842 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8843
8844 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8845
8846 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8847 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8848 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8849 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8850
8851 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8852 @item BASE @var{expression}
8853 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8854 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8855
8856 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8857 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8858 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8859 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8860
8861 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8862 @item END
8863 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8864
8865 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8866 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8867 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8868 language, but restricted to S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8869
8870 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8871 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8872 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8873 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8874
8875 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8876 same line, with no change in its effect.
8877
8878 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8879 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8880 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8881 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8882 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8883 command line.
8884
8885 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8886 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8887 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8888 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8889 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8890
8891 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8892 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8893 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8894 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8895 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8896 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8897 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8898 file, in the order specified.
8899
8900 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8901 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8902 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8903 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8904 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8905 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8906
8907 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8908 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8909 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8910 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8911 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8912 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8913 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8914 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8915 @end table
8916
8917 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8918 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8919 @include fdl.texi
8920
8921 @node LD Index
8922 @unnumbered LD Index
8923
8924 @printindex cp
8925
8926 @tex
8927 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8928 % meantime:
8929 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8930 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8931 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8932 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8933 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8934 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8935 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8936 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8937 \page\colophon
8938 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8939 @end tex
8940
8941 @bye
This page took 0.24503 seconds and 3 git commands to generate.